OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL
OOppeerraattiioonn
MMaaiinntteennaannccee
S
Sppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publica-
tion. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time
so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive
(RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD
models are opposite of those written in this manual.
F2
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate condi-
tions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in vio-
lation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government
agencies in your country.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer's instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
DANGER indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous situ-
ation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situa-
tion which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not
avoided, could result in vehicle damage.
NOTICE
WARNING
F4
FOREWORD
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI.We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis-
tinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS.We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc-
tion of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-
trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is rec-
ommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI
dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so
you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with
important operating, safety and maintenance information.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Copyright 2017 HYUNDAI Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor Company.
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
CAUTION
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight
chapters plus an index. Each chapter
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner's
Manual provides you with many safe-
ty precautions and operating proce-
dures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.
Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert sym-
bol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury haz-
ards. Obey all safety mes-
sages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert sym-
bol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.
HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL
S
SAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS
F5
Introduction
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
F6
Introduction
NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance,
we recommend you use unleaded
gasoline which has an octane rating of
RON (Research Octane Number) 95 /
AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI
87-90 but it may result in slight per-
formance reduction of the vehicle. (Do
not use methanol blended fuels)
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an Octane
Rating of RON (Research Octane
Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
87 or higher. (Do not use methanol
blended fuels)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
NOTICE
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
WARNING
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental
to the catalytic converter and
will damage the engine control
system’s oxygen sensor and
affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been speci-
fied (We recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.)
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moder-
ate injury.
CAUTION
FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS
F7
Introduction
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline.
When you are going to use leaded
gasoline, we recommend that you
ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Octane rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Other fuels
Using fuel additives such as:
- Silicone fuel additive
- MMT (Magnanese, Mn) fuel additive
- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
- Other metallic-based fuel additives
may result in cylinder misfire, poor
acceleration, engine stalling, dam-
age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-
rosion, and may cause damage to
the engine resulting in a reduction in
the overall life of the powertrain.
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the
use of these fuels may not be cov-
ered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
NOTICE
Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol. Discontinue
use of any gasohol product
which impairs drivability.
CAUTION
F8
Introduction
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding
fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in
your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system, engine
control system and emission control
system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded gasoline which has an
octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good
quality gasolines including fuel addi-
tives regularly, and have problems
starting or the engine does not run
smoothly, one bottle of additives added
to the fuel tank at every 15,000km (for
Europe) / 10,000km (except Europe).
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover dam-
age to the fuel system and any
performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels con-
taining methanol or fuels con-
taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
CAUTION
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or perform-
ance problems resulting from any
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is need-
ed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
HYUNDAI promotes an environmen-
tally sound treatment for end of life
vehicles and offers to take back your
HYUNDAI end of life vehicles in
accordance with the European Union
(EU) End of Life Vehicles Directive.
You can get detailed information
from your national HYUNDAI home-
page.
F9
Introduction
V
VEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN
PPRROOCCEESSSS
V
VEEHHIICCLLEE MMOODDIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS RREETTUURRNNIINNGG UUSSEEDD VVEEHHIICCLLEESS
((FFOORR EEUURROOPPEE))
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety system of your vehicle
Convenient features of your vehicle
Multimedia System
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Exterior overview (I) .............................................1-2
Exterior overview (II) ............................................1-3
Interior overview (I) ..............................................1-4
Interior overview (II) .............................................1-5
Instrument panel overview (I)..............................1-6
Instrument panel overview (II) ...........................1-7
Engine compartment .............................................1-8
1-2
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Hood .......................................................3-31
2. Head lamp .....................................3-83, 7-64
3. DRL (Daytime Running Light) ................7-64
4. Turn signal lamp .....................................7-64
5. Tires and wheels ............................ 7-36, 8-4
6. Outside rearview mirror ..........................3-20
7. Sunroof ...................................................3-27
8. Front windshield wiper blades ................3-95
9. Windows .................................................3-23
OOS017001
■ Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Door ........................................................3-11
2. Fuel filler door.........................................3-34
3. Rear combination lamp ..........................7-74
4. Turn signal lamp, Rear fog lamp,
Back-up lamp..........................................7-74
5. Tailgate ...................................................3-32
6. High mounted stop lamp ........................7-76
7. Defroster ...............................................3-107
8. Rearview monitor....................................3-99
9. Antenna ....................................................4-2
OOS017002
■ Rear view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
Your vehicle at a glance
I
INNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
1. Inside door handle ............................3-12
2. Outside rearview mirror folding ........3-22
3. Outside rearview mirror control ........3-21
4. Central door lock switch ....................3-13
5. Power window lock switch ................3-26
6. Power window switches ....................3-23
7. Headlight leveling device ..................3-91
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ....................................3-38
9. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system ..............................................5-55
10. Head-up display button....................3-81
11. Lane keeping assist (LKA) system..5-76
12. ESC OFF button..............................5-33
13. Hood release lever ........................3-31
14. Steering wheel tilt/telescopic lever ..3-17
15. Steering wheel ................................3-17
16. Seat ..................................................2-4
[A] : Type A, [B] : Type B
OOS017003
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Left-Hand drive type
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Inside door handle ............................3-12
2. Outside rearview mirror folding ........3-22
3. Outside rearview mirror control ........3-21
4. Central door lock switch ....................3-13
5. Power window lock switch ................3-26
6. Power window switches ....................3-23
7. Headlight leveling device ..................3-91
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch ....................................3-38
9. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system ..............................................5-55
10. Head-up display button....................3-81
11. Lane keeping assist (LKA) system..5-76
12. ESC OFF button..............................5-33
13. Hood release lever ........................3-31
14. Ignition switch ....................................5-6
15. Steering wheel tilt/telescopic lever ..3-17
16. Steering wheel ................................3-17
17. Seat ..................................................2-5
[A] : Type A, [B] : Type B
OOS017003R
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Right-Hand drive type
1-6
Your vehicle at a glance
I
INNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((II))
1. Instrument cluster ........................................3-37
2. Horn ..............................................................3-19
3. Driver’s front air bag......................................2-48
4. Key ignition switch/ ........................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button ................................5-9
5. Light control/Turn signals ..............................3-83
6. Wiper/Washer................................................3-95
7. Audio system/ ................................................4-7
Navigation system ..........................................4-4
8. Hazard warning flasher switch........................6-3
9. Manual climate control system/ ..................3-108
Automatic climate control system ..............3-116
10. Passenger’s front air bag ............................2-48
11. Glove box ..................................................3-128
12. Power outlet ..............................................3-132
13. Manual transmission shift lever/
Dual clutch transmission shift lever ..5-16, 5-19
14. Drive mode button ......................................5-53
15. Heated steering wheel ................................3-18
16. Idle stop and go (ISG) OFF button ............5-47
17. Seat warmer................................................2-19
18. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat ................2-21
19. 4WD lock button..........................................5-41
20. DBC button ................................................5-38
21. Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) button ........................3-104
22. Cup holder ................................................3-131
23. Steering wheel audio controls/ ....................4-3
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls ......................................4-4
24. Speed limiter controls/ ................................5-88
Cruise controls/ ..........................................5-90
[A-F] : Type A ~ Type F
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OOS017004
■ Left-Hand drive type
1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW ((IIII))
1
1. Instrument cluster ........................................3-37
2. Horn ..............................................................3-19
3. Driver’s front air bag......................................2-48
4. Engine Start/Stop button ................................5-9
5. Light control/Turn signals ..............................3-83
6. Wiper/Washer................................................3-95
7. Audio system/ ................................................4-7
Navigation system ..........................................4-4
8. Hazard warning flasher switch........................6-3
9. Manual climate control system/ ..................3-108
Automatic climate control system ..............3-116
10. Passenger’s front air bag ............................2-48
11. Glove box..................................................3-128
12. Power outlet ..............................................3-132
13. Manual transmission shift lever/
Dual clutch transmission shift lever ..5-16, 5-19
14. 4WD lock button..........................................5-41
15. DBC button .................................5-38
16. Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward)
button ........................................................3-104
17. Seat warmer................................................2-19
18. Seat warmer/Air ventilation seat ................2-21
19. Drive mode button ......................................5-53
20. Heated steering wheel ...............................3-18
21. Idle stop and go (ISG) OFF button ............5-47
22. Cup holder ................................................3-131
23. Steering wheel audio controls/ ....................4-3
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology
hands-free controls ......................................4-4
24. Speed limiter controls/ ................................5-88
Cruise controls ..........................................5-90
[A-F] : Type A ~ Type F
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OOS017004E
■ Right-Hand drive type
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine coolant reservoir/
Engine coolant cap ..............................7-23
2. Fuse box ..............................................7-55
3. Battery ................................................7-32
4. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ..................7-26
5. Air cleaner ...........................................7-28
6. Engine oil dipstick ............................... 7-21
7. Engine oil filler cap ..............................7-22
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir........7-27
OOS077070L/OOS077001
■■
Gasoline Engine (Kappa 1.0 T-GDI)
■■
Gasoline Engine (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
1-8
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Important safety precautions .............................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain all children .........................................................2-2
Air bag hazards ................................................................2-2
Driver distraction .............................................................2-2
Control your speed ..........................................................2-3
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ............................2-3
Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety precautions ..........................................................2-6
Front seats..........................................................................2-7
Rear seats .........................................................................2-12
Headrest ...........................................................................2-15
Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-19
Seat belts .............................................................2-22
Seat belt safety precautions ......................................2-22
Seat belt warning light .................................................2-23
Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-25
Additional seat belt safety precautions ...................2-30
Care of seat belts ..........................................................2-32
Child restraint system (CRS) .............................2-33
Our recommendation:Children always in the rear..2-33
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-34
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-36
Air bag - supplemental restraint system ........2-45
Where are the air bags? ..............................................2-48
How does the air bags system operate? .................2-53
What to expect after an air bag inflates ................2-57
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? ...........2-58
SRS care ...........................................................................2-63
Additional safety precautions .....................................2-64
Air bag warning labels ..................................................2-64
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.
2-2
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this man-
ual.The safety precautions in this sec-
tion are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
Restrain all children
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate Child
Restraint System. Larger children
should use a booster seat with the
lap/shoulder belt until they can use
the seat belt properly without a
booster seat.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not prop-
erly restrained. Infants, young chil-
dren, and short adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-
tions and warnings in this manual.
Driver distraction
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, espe-
cially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driv-
ing. To reduce your risk of distraction
and an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-
tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and conditions per-
mit safe use. NEVER text or email
while driving. Most countries have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some countries and cities also pro-
hibit drivers from using handheld
phones.
IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS
Safety system of your vehicle
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
• NEVER let the use of a mobile device
distract you from driving. You have a
responsibility to your passengers and
others on the road to always drive
safely, with your hands on the wheel
as well as your eyes and attention on
the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current condi-
tions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condi-
tion
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such prob-
lems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
2-4
SSEEAATTSS
Safety system of your vehicle
OOS037073
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height *
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*/Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
Rear seat
(7) Armrest*
(8) Seatback folding
(9) Headrest
* : if equipped
[A] : Driver’s Side, [B] : Rear seat
■ Left-Hand drive type
2-5
Safety system of your vehicle
2
OOS037001R
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height *
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*/Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
Rear seat
(7) Armrest*
(8) Seatback folding
(9) Headrest
* : if equipped
[A] : Driver’s Side, [B] : Rear seat
■ Right-Hand drive type
2-6
Safety system of your vehicle
Safety precautions
Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-
ting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates. Move
your seat as far back as possible
from front air bags, while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip. At all times, passen-
gers should sit upright and be prop-
erly restrained. Infants and small
children must be restrained in appro-
priate Child Restraint Systems.
Children who have outgrown a
booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.
Do not use a cushion that reduces
friction between the seat and the
passenger.The passenger's hips
may slide under the lap portion
of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far
to the rear as possible main-
taining the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to min-
imize the risk of injuries to
your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or any-
one between you and the air
bag.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride on a passenger’s
lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
WARNING
2-7
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Front seats
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control lever (or knob) or
switches located on the outside of the
seat cushion. Before driving, adjust
the seat to the proper position so that
you can easily control the steering
wheel, foot pedals and controls on the
instrument panel.
Manual adjustment
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion for-
ward may cause strong pres-
sure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
CAUTION
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seat-
back.
WARNING
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
• Use extreme caution when
picking up small objects
trapped under the seats or
between the seat and the center
console. Your hands might be
cut or injured by the sharp
edges of the seat mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the
rear seats, be careful while
adjusting the front seat posi-
tion.
OOS037002
2-8
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the knob and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down the lever several times,
to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up the lever several times, to
raise the seat cushion.
OOS037003
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
OOS037004
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Power adjustment
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has been adjust-
ed as far forward or rearward as
possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the engine
is turned off. This may result in
unnecessary battery drain.
• Do not operate two or more seats
at the same time. This may result
in an electrical malfunction.
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat-
back reaches the desired position.
NOTICE
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.
WARNING
OOS037005 OOS037006
2-10
Safety system of your vehicle
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cush-
ion:
1. • Push the front portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion.
• Push the rear portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or down to
lower the height of the seat cush-
ion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
NEVER ride with a reclined seat-
back when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
OOS037007
2-11
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
• The lumbar support can be adjust-
ed by pressing the lumbar support
switch.
• Press the front portion of the switch
(1) to increase support or the rear
portion of the switch (2) to decrease
support.
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.
OOS037008
■ Type B
OOS037074
■ Type A
OOS037075
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
CAUTION
2-12
Safety system of your vehicleSafety system of your vehicle
Rear seats
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
3.Locate the seatbelt toward the out-
board position before folding down
the seatback to avoid the seatbelt
system interfering with the seat-
back.
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward
and cause injury or damage
during sudden stops.
WARNING
OOS037019 OOS037020
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
2
4. Put out the belt from guide (1) and
pull up the seatback folding lever
(2), then fold the seat toward the
front of the vehicle.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and push
the seatback rearward.
Push the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
Insert the belt in the guide.
OOS037022
OOS037021
OOS037023
When returning the rear seat-
back from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seat-
back. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
2-14
Safety system of your vehicle
Armrest (if equipped)
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the seatback to use it.
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if
the shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
WARNING
OOS037024
Cargo should always be secured
to prevent it from being thrown
about the vehicle in a collision
and causing injury to the vehicle
occupants. Do not place objects
in the rear seats, since they can-
not be properly secured and may
hit the front seat occupants in a
collision.
WARNING
• Be careful when loading cargo
through the rear passenger
seats to prevent damage to
the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
CAUTION
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Headrest
The vehicle’s front and rear seats have
adjustable headrests. The headrests
provide comfort for passengers, but
more importantly they are designed to
help protect passengers from whiplash
and other neck and spinal injuries dur-
ing an accident, especially in a rear
impact collision.
To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the headrests.
NOTICE
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your headrests:
• Always properly adjust the
headrests for all passengers
BEFORE starting the vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
•
Adjust the headrests so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the height of
the top of the eyes.
• NEVER adjust the headrest
position of the driver’s seat
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the headrest as close
to the passenger’s head as
possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the headrest locks
into position after adjusting it.
WARNING
OLF034072N
When there is no occupant in
the rear seats, adjust the height
of the headrest to the lowest
position. The rear seat headrest
can reduce the visibility of the
rear area.
CAUTION
2-16
Safety system of your vehicle
Front seat headrests
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats are equipped with adjustable
headrests for the passengers safety
and comfort.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position
(1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Forward and rearward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 3 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the head-
rest to it’s furthest rearwards posi-
tion, pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it.
OPDE036068
OOS037061 OOS037010
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
2
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and
seat cushion raised, the headrest
may come in contact with the sun-
visor or other parts of the vehicle.
Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with using
the seatback angle lever or switch
(1).
2. Raise the headrest as far as it can
go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
NOTICE
OOS037011
OOS037012
■ Type A
■ Type B
OLF034015
NEVER allow anyone to travel in a
seat with the headrest removed.
WARNING
2-18
Safety system of your vehicle
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Recline the seatback.
2. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropri-
ate height.
4. Recline the seatback (4) the seat-
back angle knob or switch (3).
Rear seat headrests
The rear seats are equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the passenger’s safety and com-
fort.
OPDE036069
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after rein-
stalling and adjusting it properly.
WARNING
OOS037013
OOS037014
■ Type A
■ Type B
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Seat warmers and air ventila-
tion seats
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect tem-
perature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme cau-
tion, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
WARNING
OOS037018
• Adjust the headrests so the
middle of the headrests is at
the same height as the height
of the top of the eyes.
• When seating on the rear seat,
do not adjust the height of the
headrest to the lowest.
CAUTION
2-20
Safety system of your vehicle
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer.
[A] : Type A, [B] : Type B
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the dri-
ver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is placed to the ON position.
Information
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
i
NOTICE
OOS037015
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in oper-
ation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, caus-
ing a burn or damage to the seat.
WARNING
2-21
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Front air ventilation seat
(if equipped)
The air ventilation seats are provided
to cool the front seats by blowing air
through small vent holes on the sur-
face of the seat cushions and seat-
backs.
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion seat is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to cool the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat (if equipped).
• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the air venti-
lation seat operating, the operation
will turn OFF.
• The air ventilation seats defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is placed to the ON
position.
To prevent damage to the air ven-
tilation seat:
• Use the air ventilation seat ONLY
when the climate control system
is on. Using the air ventilation
seat for prolonged periods of
time with the climate control sys-
tem off could cause the air venti-
lation seat to malfunction.
• Never use a solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol or gaso-
line to clean the seats.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the sur-
face of the front seats and seat-
backs; this may cause the air vent
holes to become blocked and not
work properly.
• Do not place materials such as
plastic bags or newspapers under
the seats. They may block the air
intake causing the air vents to not
work properly.
• Do not change the seat covers. It
may damage the air ventilation
seat.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is no
change, we recommend that you
have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
OFF HIGH ( )
LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )
→
→
→
→
OOS037016
2-22
Safety system of your vehicle
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.
Seat belt safety precautions
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fas-
tened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an addi-
tional safety device, but they are not a
substitute. Most countries require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.
SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• Children under the age of 13
should be properly restrained
in the rear seats.
• Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat, unless
the air bag is deactivated. If a
child is seated in the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and prop-
erly restrain them in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
WARNING
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Never wear a seat belt over
fragile objects. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, the seat
belt can damage it.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
2-23
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Seat belt warning light
Seat belt warning
Driver’s seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch ON
regardless of belt fastening.
If the seat belt is not fastened when
the ignition switch is turned ON or if
it is disconnected after the ignition
switch is turned ON, the seat belt
warning light will illuminate until the
belt is fastened.
If you start to drive without the seat
belt fastened or you unfasten the
seat belt when you drive under
20km/h, the corresponding warning
light will continue to illuminate until
you fasten the seat belt.
If you continue to drive without the
seat belt fastened or you unfasten
the seat belt when you drive over
20km/h, the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-
aged webbing.
• Damaged hardware.
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent.
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
OAM032161L
■ Instrument cluster
2-24
Safety system of your vehicle
Front passenger’s seat belt warning
As a reminder to the front passenger,
the front passenger’s seat belt warn-
ing lights will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds each time you turn
the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
If the seat belt is not fastened when
the ignition switch is turned ON or if
it is disconnected after the ignition
switch is turned ON, the seat belt
warning light will illuminate until the
belt is fastened.
If you start to drive without the seat
belt fastened or you unfasten the
seat belt when you drive under
20km/h, the corresponding warning
light will continue to illuminate until
you fasten the seat belt.
If you continue to drive without the
seat belt fastened or you unfasten
the seat belt when you drive over
20km/h, the seat belt warning chime
will sound for approximately 100 sec-
onds and the corresponding warning
light will blink.
Information
• You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the center
fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink or illuminate for 6
seconds.
• The front passenger's seat belt
warning may operate when luggage
is placed on the front passenger seat.
i
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front pas-
senger's seat belt warning sys-
tem. It is important for the driver
to instruct the passenger to
properly be seated as instructed
in this manual.
WARNING
OOS037025
2-25
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning
As a reminder to the rear passen-
gers, the rear passenger’s seat belt
warning lights will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time
you turn the ignition switch ON
regardless of belt fastening.
And then, the rear corresponding
seat belt warning light will illuminate
for approximately 35 seconds, if any
of the following occurs:
- You drive over 9km/h when the rear
seat belt is not fastened.
- The rear seat belt is disconnected
when driving under 20km/h.
If the rear seat belt is fastened, the
warning light will turn off immediately.
If the rear seat belt is disconnected
when you drive over the 20km/h, the
corresponding seat belt warning light
will blink and warning chime will
sound for 35 seconds.
But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoul-
der belt is/are connected and discon-
nected twice within 9 seconds after
the belt is fastened, the corresponding
seat belt warning light will not operate.
Seat belt restraint system
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).
There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean for-
ward too quickly.
OOS037026
ODH033055
2-26
Safety system of your vehicle
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near-
est the door, not over your neck.
NOTICE
ODH033056
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the fol-
lowing precautions when adjust-
ing the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly. This
allows your strong pelvic bones
to absorb the force of the crash,
reducing the chance of internal
injuries.
WARNING
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illus-
tration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
2-27
Safety system of your vehicle
2
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twist-
ed, then try again.
Rear center seatbelt
(3-point rear center seat belt)
1.Insert the tongue plate (1) into the
buckle (2) until an audible “click" is
heard, indicating the latch is
locked. Make sure the belt is not
twisted.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
OOS037060
■ Front seat
ODH033057
OOS037027
Always have the metal tab
inserted into the buckle.
WARNING
2-28
Safety system of your vehicle
Information
If you are not able to pull out the safe-
ty belt from the retractor, firmly pull
the belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the belt
out smoothly.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's and rear pas-
sengers (if equipped) Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner).
The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to
make sure the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in cer-
tain frontal or side collision(s). The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be acti-
vated in crashes where the frontal or
side collision(s) is severe enough,
together with the air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position.
In certain frontal collisions, the pre-
tensioner will activate and pull the
seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner system acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the retrac-
tor pre-tensioner will release some of
the pressure on the affected seat belt.
i
OLMB033039
• Always wear your seat belt and
sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not pro-
tect you properly in an acci-
dent.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-ten-
sioners after activation or an
accident.
WARNING
2-29
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner
(3) SRS control module
(4) Rear Retractor pre-tensioner
(if equipped)
The sensor that activates the SRS
control module is connected with
the pre–tensioner seat belts. The
SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument cluster will illuminate
for approximately 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position, and then it should
turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illu-
minate even if the SRS air bag is not
malfunctioning. If the warning light
does not illuminate, stays illuminat-
ed or illuminates when the vehicle
is being driven, we recommend the
pre-tensioner seat belts and/or SRS
control module be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioner can become hot
and can burn you.
WARNING
Body work on the front area of
the vehicle may damage the
pre-tensioner seat belt system.
Therefore, we recommend the
system to be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
OLMB033040/Q
OPDE037069
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assem-
blies.
2-30
Safety system of your vehicle
Information
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal or side
collisions.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be inhaled for prolonged periods.
Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
Additional seat belt safety pre-
cautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, rout-
ed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the lap belt
below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY
across your hips and pelvic bone,
under the rounded part of the belly.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
Most countries have Child Restraint
System laws which require children to
travel in approved Child Restraint
System devices, including booster
seats. The age at which seat belts can
be used instead of Child Restraint
System differs among countries, so
you should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country, and
where you are travelling. Infant and
Child Restraint System must be prop-
erly placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the “Child
Restraint Systems” in this chapter.
i
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, preg-
nant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
WARNING
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat by a
Child Restraint System that meets
the requirements of the Safety
Standards of your country. Before
buying any Child Restraint System,
make sure that it has a label certify-
ing that it meets Safety Standard of
your country.
The Child Restraint System must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
Child Restraint System for this infor-
mation. Refer to “Child Restraint
Systems” in this chapter.
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat should
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoul-
der and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt
out of position. In the event of an acci-
dent, children are afforded the best
safety restrained by a proper Child
Restraint System in the rear seats.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rear-
most position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck, they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.
Seat belt use and injured people
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific rec-
ommendations.
ALWAYS properly restrain
infants and small children in a
Child Restraint System appropri-
ate for the child’s height and
weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving. The violent
forces created during an acci-
dent will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
• Always make sure larger chil-
dren’s seat belts are worn and
properly adjusted.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
WARNING
2-32
Safety system of your vehicle
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dan-
gerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
During an accident, you could be
thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seat back is reclined,
the greater the chance for the pas-
senger's hips to slide under the lap
belt or the passenger's neck to strike
the shoulder belt.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. We recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Driver and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
WARNING
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
2
CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))
Our recommendation:
Children always in the rear
Children under age 13 should always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to min-
imize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Children too large for a
Child Restraint System must use the
seat belts provided.
Most countries have regulations
which require children to travel in
approved Child Restraint Systems.
The laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
Child Restraint System differs
among countries, so you should be
aware of the specific requirements in
your country, and where you are trav-
elling.
Child Restraint Systems must be
properly installed in the vehicle seat.
Always use a commercially available
Child Restraint System that meets
the requirements of your country.
Child Restraint System (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rearward-
facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the seat
of the vehicle. Read and comply with
the instructions for installation and
use provided by the manufacturer of
the Child Restraint System.
Always properly restrain children
in the vehicle. Children of all ages
are safer when riding in the rear
seats. Never place a rearward-
facing Child Restraint System on
the front passenger seat, unless
the air bag is deactivated.
WARNING
•
Always follow the Child Restraint
System manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the Child Restraint
System.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that “hooks”
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate protection in an
accident.
• After an accident, we recom-
mend a HYUNDAI dealer to
check the Child Restraint
System, seat belts, ISOFIX
anchorages and top-tether
anchorages.
WARNING
2-34
Safety system of your vehicle
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a Child Restraint
System for your child, always:
• Make sure the Child Restraint
System has a label certifying that it
meets applicable Safety Standards
of your country.
A Child Restraint System may only
be installed if it was approved in
accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R44 or ECE-R129.
• Select a Child Restraint System
based on your child’s height and
weight. The required label or the
instructions for use typically pro-
vide this information.
• Select a Child Restraint System
that fits the vehicle seating position
where it will be used.
• Read and comply with the warn-
ings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the Child
Restraint System.
Child Restraint System types
There are three main types of Child
Restraint Systems: rearward-facing,
forward-facing and booster Child
Restraint Systems.
They are classified according to the
child’s age, height and weight.
Rearward-facing Child Restraint
System
A rearward-facing Child Restraint
System provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of
the child. The harness system holds
the child in place, and in an accident,
acts to keep the child positioned in
the Child Restraint Systems and
reduce the stress to the fragile neck
and spinal cord.
OOS037028
2-35
Safety system of your vehicle
2
All children under the age of one year
must always ride in a rearward-facing
Child Restraint System. There are dif-
ferent types of rearward-facing Child
Restraint Systems: infant-only Child
Restraint Systems can only be used
rearward-facing. Convertible and 3-in-
1 Child Restraint Systems typically
have higher height and weight limits
for the rearward-facing position, allow-
ing you to keep your child rearward-
facing for a longer period of time.
Keep using Child Restraint Systems
in the rearward-facing position as long
as children fit within the height and
weight limits allowed by the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer.
Forward-facing Child Restraint
System
A forward-facing Child Restraint System
provides restraint for the child’s body
with a harness. Keep children in a for-
ward-facing Child Restraint System
with a harness until they reach the
top height or weight limit allowed by
your Child Restraint System’s manu-
facturer.
Once your child outgrows the forward-
facing Child Restraint System, your
child is ready for a booster seat.
Booster seats
A booster seat is a Child Restraint
System designed to improve the fit of
the vehicle’s seat belt system. A boost-
er seat positions the seat belt so that it
fits properly over the stronger parts of
your child’s body. Keep your children in
booster seats until they are big
enough to fit in a seat belt properly.
For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap
belt must lie comfortable across the
upper thighs, not the stomach. The
shoulder belt should lie comfortable
across the shoulder and chest and
not across the neck or face. Children
under age 13 must always be proper-
ly restrained to minimize the risk of
injury in an accident, sudden stop or
sudden maneuver.
OOS037029
2-36
Safety system of your vehicle
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
After selecting a proper Child Restraint
System for your child and checking
that the Child Restraint System fits
properly on the seating position, there
are three general steps for a proper
installation:
• Properly secure the Child Restraint
System to the vehicle.
All Child
Restraint Systems must be secured
to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the ISOFIX top-tether and/or ISOFIX
anchorage and/or with the support
leg.
• Make sure the Child Restraint
System is firmly secured. After
installing a Child Restraint System
to the vehicle, push and pull the
seat forward and from side-to-side
to verify that it is securely attached
to the seat. A Child Restraint
System secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-to-
side movement can be expected.
When installing a Child Restraint
System, adjust the vehicle seat and
seatback (up and down, forward and
rearward) so that your child fits in
the Child Restraint System in a con-
fortable manner.
• Secure the child in the Child
Restraint System. Make sure the
child is properly strapped in the
Child Restraint System according
to the Child Restraint System man-
ufacturer’s instructions.
Before installing your Child
Restraint System always:
Read and follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer of
the Child Restraint System.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a Child
Restraint System, the headrest
of the respective seating posi-
tion shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
WARNING
A Child Restraint System in a
closed vehicle can become very
hot. To prevent burns, check the
seating surface and buckles
before placing your child in the
Child Restraint System.
CAUTION
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
2
ISOFIX anchorage and top-teth-
er anchorage (ISOFIX anchorage
system) for children
The ISOFIX system holds a Child
Restraint System during driving and in
an accident.This system is designed to
make installation of the Child Restraint
System easier and reduce the possi-
bility of improperly installing your
Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX
system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the Child
Restraint System. The ISOFIX sys-
tem eliminates the need to use seat
belts to secure the Child Restraint
System to the rear seats.
ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars
built into the vehicle. There are two
lower anchors for each ISOFIX seat-
ing position that will accommodate a
Child Restraint System with lower
attachments.
To use the ISOFIX system in your vehi-
cle, you must have a Child Restraint
System with ISOFIX attachments.
The Child Restraint System manu-
facturer will provide you with instruc-
tions on how to use the Child
Restraint System with its attach-
ments for the ISOFIX anchorages.
ISOFIX anchorages have been pro-
vided in the left and right outboard
rear seating positions. Their locations
are shown in the illustration.
[A] : ISOFIX Anchorage Position Indicator,
[B] : ISOFIX Anchorage
ISOFIX anchorages are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions, indicated
by the symbols .
To use the ISOFIX anchorages, push
the upper portion of the ISOFIX
anchorage cover.
OOS037076
Do not attempt to install a Child
Restraint System using ISOFIX
anchorages in the rear center
seating position. There are no
ISOFIX anchorages provided for
this seat. Using the outboard seat
anchorages, for the CRS installa-
tion on the rear center seating
position, can damage the anchor-
ages.
WARNING
OAE036063
2-38
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a Child Restraint
System with the “ISOFIX
Anchorage System”
To install an i-Size or ISOFIX-compat-
ible Child Restraint System in either of
the rear outboard seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the ISOFIX anchorages.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchorages that could prevent
a secure connection between the
Child Restraint System and the
ISOFIX anchorages.
3. Place the Child Restraint System
on the vehicle seat, then attach the
seat to the ISOFIX anchorages
according to the instructions provid-
ed by the Child Restraint System
manufacturer.
4. Follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System's manufacturer
for proper installation and connec-
tion of the ISOFIX attachments on
the Child Restraint System to the
ISOFIX anchorages.
Securing a Child Restraint
System seat with “Top-tether
Anchorage” system
Top-tether anchorages for Child
Restraint Systems are located on the
rear of the seatbacks.
Take the following precautions
when using the ISOFIX system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your Child Restraint System.
• To prevent the child from reach-
ing and taking hold of unre-
tracted seat belts, buckle all
unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around their
neck and the seat belt tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
Child Restraint System to a
single anchorage. This could
cause the anchor or attach-
ment to come loose or break.
• Always have the ISOFIX sys-
tem inspected by your dealer
after an accident. An accident
can damage the ISOFIX system
and may not properly secure
the Child Restraint System.
WARNING
OOS037031
2-39
Safety system of your vehicle
2
1. Route the Child Restraint System
top-tether strap over the seatback.
Placing the top tether strap, please
follow the instructions of the Child
Restraint System manufacturer.
2. Connect the top-tether strap to the
top-tether anchorage, then tighten
the top-tether strap according to the
instructions of your Child Restraint
System's manufacturer to firmly
attach the Child Restraint System to
the seat.
OOS037032
Take the following precautions
when installing the top-tether:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your Child Restraint System.
• NEVER attach more than one
Child Restraint System to a
single ISOFIX top-tether
anchorage. This could cause
the anchorage or attachment
to come loose or break.
• Do not attach the top-tether to
anything other than the cor-
rect top-tether anchorage. It
may not work properly if
attached to something else.
• Child Restraint System anchor-
ages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted Child Restraint
System.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for attach-
ing other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
WARNING
2-40
Safety system of your vehicle
Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations
IUF = suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal
category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given
in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "spe-
cific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in
this mass group and/or this size class.
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
(height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint
System (height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)
Mass Group
Size
Class
Fixture
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Front Passenger
2nd row
Left Hand Center Right Hand
Carrycot
F ISO/L1 N/A X N/A X
G ISO/L2 N/A X N/A X
0- : UP TO 10KG E ISO/R1 N/A IL N/A IL
0+ : UP TO 13KG
E ISO/R1 N/A IL N/A IL
D ISO/R2 N/A IL N/A IL
C ISO/R3 N/A IL N/A IL
1 : 9 TO 18KG
D ISO/R2 N/A IL N/A IL
C ISO/R3 N/A IL N/A IL
B ISO/F2 N/A IUF,IL N/A IUF,IL
B1 ISO/F2X N/A IUF,IL N/A IUF,IL
A ISO/F3 N/A IUF,IL N/A IUF,IL
2-41
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Securing a Child Restraint
System with a lap/shoulder belt
When not using the ISOFIX system,
all Child Restraint Systems must be
secured to a rear seat with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt.
Installing a Child Restraint System
with a lap/shoulder belt
To install a Child Restraint System
on the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the Child Restraint System
on a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through
the Child Restraint System, follow-
ing the Child Restraint System
manufacturer’s instructions. Make
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. Make sure to insert the
belt into the guide(1).
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
OLMB033044 OOS037030
ODH033063
2-42
Safety system of your vehicle
Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the Child Restraint System while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
4. Push and pull on the Child Restraint
System to confirm that the seat belt
is holding it firmly in place.
If your Child Restraint System manu-
facturer recommends the use of a
top-tether with the lap/shoulder belt,
see page 2-38.
To remove the Child Restraint System,
press the release button on the buckle
and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out
of the Child Restraint System and
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
i
OLMB033046
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to
ECE regulations
U = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group.
U* = Suitable for "universal" category Child Restraint Systems approved for use in this mass group (When you install the child seat on Front
Passenger seat,
you should move the seat position to upward and the seat back position to forward properly, to restrain child seat.)
❈ Height adjustable device of Front passenger seat is an optional feature.
U** = Seating position not suitable for fitment of Child Restraint Systems with support leg.
UF = Suitable for forward facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
We recommend that a child restraint seat be installed in the rear seat, even if the front passenger's air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position. To ensure the safety of your child, the front passenger's air bag
must be deactivated when it should be necessary to install a child restraint seat on the front passenger
seat in exceptional circumstances.
WARNING
Mass Group
Seating Position
Front Passenger Second Row
Airbag
activated
Airbag
deactivated
Outboard
Left
Center
(3 POINT BELT)
Outboard
Right
Group 0
(0-9months)
up to 10kg X U* U U** U
Group 0 +
(0-2years)
up to 13kg X U* U U** U
Group I
(9months-4years)
9 to 18kg X U* U U** U
Group II
(15 to 25kg)
15 to 25kg UF U* U U U
Group III
(22 to 36kg)
22 to 36kg UF U* U U U
2-44
Safety system of your vehicle
i-Size Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations
i-U : Suitable for i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems forward and rearward-facing
i-UF : Suitable for forward-facing i-Size "universal" Child Restraint Systems only
X : Seat position not suitable for i-size Child Restraint Systems
Mass Group
Seating Position
Passenger Front
Second Row
Outboard Left Center
Outboard
Right
i-size Child Restraint Systems X i-U X i-U
Recommended child restraint systems (for Europe)
CRS Manufacturer information
Maxi Cosi Cabriofix & Familyfix http://www.maxi-cosi.com
Britax Römmer http://www.britax.com
Graco http//www.gracobaby.com
Mass Group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Group 0+ Cabriofix & Familyfix Maxi Cosi Rearward-facing with ISOFIX E4 04443907
Group I Duo Plus Britax Römer Forward-facing with ISOFIX and top-tether E1 04301133
Group II KidFix II XP
Britax Römer
Forward-facing with ISOFIX and vehicle Belt E1 04301323
Group III Junior III
Graco
Forward-facing with vehicle Belt
E11 03.44.164
E11 03.44.165
2-45
Safety system of your vehicle
AAIIRR BBAAGG -- SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
2
OOS037034/OOS037070L
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag
2. Passenger’s front air bag
3. Side air bag*
4. Curtain air bag*
5. Front passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
■ Left-Hand drive type
2-46
Safety system of your vehicle
OOS037034R/OOS037070E
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Driver’s front air bag
2. Passenger’s front air bag
3. Side air bag*
4. Curtain air bag*
5. Front passenger air bag ON/OFF
switch*
* : if equipped
■ Right-Hand drive type
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
2
The vehicles are equipped with a
Supplemental Air Bag System for the
driver’s seat and front passenger’s
seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts Child Restraint Systems - every trip, every
time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your
seat belt when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any Child Restraint System or booster seat in
the front passenger seat, unless the air bag is deactivated.
An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing
serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle.
WARNING
2-48
Safety system of your vehicle
Where are the air bags?
Driver’s and passenger’s front
air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both
the driver and passenger seating
positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steer-
ing wheel, in the driver’s side lower
crash pad below the steering wheel,
and the passenger's side front panel
pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the let-
ters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad
covers.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passen-
gers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone in case of a frontal impact of
sufficient severity.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from inflating front
air bags, take the following pre-
cautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passen-
ger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
WARNING
OOS037035
OOS037039
■ Passenger’s front air bag
■ Driver’s front air bag
2-49
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The purpose of the switch is to dis-
able the passenger’s front air bag in
order to transport occupants who are
at increased risk for air bag-related
injury due to age, size, or medical
condition.
To deactivate the passenger’s front
air bag:
Insert the key or a similar rigid device
into the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and turn it to the
OFF position. The passenger air bag
OFF indicator ( ) will illuminate and
stay on until the passenger’s front air
bag is reactivated.
OOS037071L OOS037038L
• No objects (such as crash pad
cover, cellular phone holder,
cup holder, perfume or stickers)
should be placed over or near
the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, windshield glass, and
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box. Such
objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe
enough to cause the air bags to
deploy.
• Do not attach any objects on
the front windshield and inside
mirror.
2-50
Safety system of your vehicle
To reactivate the passenger’s front
air bag:
Insert the key or a similar rigid device
into the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON
position. The passenger air bag ON
indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay
on for 60 seconds.
Information
The passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
i
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the passenger air
bag OFF indicator is illuminat-
ed. During a collision, the air
bag will not inflate if the indica-
tor is illuminated. Turn on the
passenger’s front air bag or
have your passenger move to
the rear seat.
WARNING
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions,
the following conditions may
occur:
• The air bag warning light ( )
on the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
• The passenger air bag OFF
indicator ( ) will not illumi-
nate and the ON indicator ( )
will come on and go off after
approximately 60 seconds.
The passenger’s front air bag
will inflate in a frontal impact
even though the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch is
set to the OFF position.
• We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and the SRS air
bag system as soon as possi-
ble.
WARNING
OOS037072L
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Side air bags (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s
driver and the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact col-
lisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact.
The side air bags on both sides of the
vehicle are designed to deploy when a
rollover is detected by a rollover sen-
sor. (if equipped with rollover sensor)
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident
it may cause vehicle damage
or personal injury especially
when air bag is inflated.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself. Also, do not
attach any objects around the
area the air bag inflates such
as the door, side door glass,
front and rear pillar.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
WARNING
OOS037040
OOS037041
2-52
Safety system of your vehicle
Curtain air bags (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and impact.
The curtain air bags on both sides of the
vehicle are designed to deploy when a
rollover is detected by a rollover sensor.
(if equipped with rollover sensor)
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
OOS037042
OOS037043
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition switch
is in the ON position as this
may cause the side air bags to
inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bag, take the follow-
ing precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
WARNING
2-53
Safety system of your vehicle
2
How does the air bags system
operate?
The SRS consists of the following
components:
(1) Driver's front air bag module
(2) Passenger's front air bag module
(3) Side air bag modules
(4) Curtain air bag modules
(5) Rear retractor pre-tensioner
(if equipped)
(6) Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies
(7) Air bag warning light
(8) SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
(9) Front impact sensors
(10) Side impact sensors
(11) Side pressure sensors
(12) Passenger’s front air bag OFF
indicator (front passenger's seat
only)
(13) Passenger’s front air bag ON/
OFF switch
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
OOS037063L
• Properly secure Child Restraint
System as far away from the
door as possible.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag. Also, do not attach
any objects around the area the
air bag inflates such as the
door, side door glass, front and
rear pillar, roof side rail.
• Do not hang other objects
except clothes, especially
hard or breakable objects.
In an accident, it may cause
vehicle damage or personal
injury.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
2-54
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration. The
system checks the air bag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light indi-
cates that there is a potential problem
with your air bag system, which could
include your side and/or curtain air
bags used for rollover protection (if
equipped with rollover sensor).
During a moderate to severe frontal
collision, sensors will detect the vehi-
cle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the con-
trol unit will inflate the front air bags,
at the time and with the force needed.
The front air bags help protect the driv-
er and front passenger by responding
to frontal impacts in which seat belts
alone cannot provide adequate
restraint. When needed, the side air
bags help provide protection in the
event of a side impact or rollover by
supporting the side upper body area.
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate
if necessary) only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of certain
frontal or side collisions to help pro-
tect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags
are designed to inflate based upon
the severity of a collision and its direc-
tion. These two factors determine
whether the sensors produce an elec-
tronic deployment/inflation signal.
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following condi-
tions occur, your SRS is mal-
functioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
SRS as soon as possible if any
of these conditions occur.
WARNING
2-55
Safety system of your vehicle
2
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an acci-
dent. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and/or
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, curtain
air bags will remain inflated longer
to help provide protection from ejec-
tion, especially when used in con-
junction with the seat belts. (if
equipped with a rollover sensor)
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The speed
of air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which to
inflate the air bag between the
occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries and is thus a
necessary part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag. An air bag needs
space to inflate. It is recommended
that drivers sit as far as possible
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest while still main-
taining control of the vehicle.
2-56
Safety system of your vehicle
When the SRSCM detects a suffi-
ciently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the front pas-
senger's forward motion, reducing
the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibili-
ty and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
OLMB033055
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OLMB033056
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
OLMB033057
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OLMB033054
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
2
What to expect after an air bag
inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may feel
substantial discomfort in breathing
because of the contact of your chest
with both the seat belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. The powder may
aggravate asthma for some people. If
you experience breathing problems
after an air bag deployment, seek
medical attention immediately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this
is the case, wash and rinse with cold
water immediately and seek medical
attention if the symptoms persist.
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after
impact to reduce prolonged
exposure to the smoke and
powder released by the inflat-
ing air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag stor-
age area’s internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with cold
water and mild soap.
• We recommend that an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the air bag immediately after
deployment. Air bags are
designed to be used only once.
WARNING
To prevent objects from becom-
ing dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD hold-
er, stickers, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box where the passen-
ger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
WARNING
2-58
Safety system of your vehicle
Do not install a Child Restraint
System on the front passenger
seat
Never install a Child Restraint System
in the front passenger seat, unless the
air bag is deactivated
Why didn't my air bag go off in
a collision?
There are certain types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional protec-
tion. These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle
indicates a collision energy absorp-
tion, and is not an indicator of whether
or not an air bag should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
OYDESA2042
NEVER use a rearward facing
Child Restraint on a seat pro-
tected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
•
Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
WARNING
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sen-
sors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards or
replace the bumper with a non-
genuine part.This may adverse-
ly affect the collision and air
bag deployment performance.
• Place the ignition switch to
the LOCK/OFF or ACC posi-
tion, when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• We recommend that all air bag
repairs are conducted by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2-59
Safety system of your vehicle
2
1. SRS control module
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor (front)*
4. Side impact sensor (rear)*
* : if equipped
OOS037044/OOS037045/OOS037046/OOS037047/OOS037077
2-60
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the severity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Although the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags are designed to
inflate in frontal collisions, they also
may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in side impact collisions, but
they may inflate in other collisions if
the side impact sensors detect a suf-
ficient impact.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor. (if
equipped with rollover sensor)
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OOS037050
OOS037041
OOS037049
2-61
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severity,
vehicle speed and angles of impact.
OOS037053
OOS037052
OOS037054
2-62
Safety system of your vehicle
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to “ride” under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "under-
ride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
“underride” collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
Information
• Vehicles equipped with rollover sensor
The side and curtain air bags may
inflate in a rollover situation, when it is
detected by the rollover sensor.
• Vehicles not equipped with rollover
sensor
The side and/or curtain air bags may
inflate when the vehicle is rolled over
by a side impact collision, if the vehicle
is equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags.
i
OTL035069 OOS037055 OTL035068
2-63
Safety system of your vehicle
2
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the colli-
sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-
cle structure.
SRS care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, we recommend that the system
be immediately inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
We recommend any work on the SRS
system, such as removing, installing,
repairing, or any work on the steering
wheel, the front passenger's panel,
front seats and roof rails be performed
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
OOS037056
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death take the follow-
ing precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure.
WARNING
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• We recommend that inflated
air bags be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions must
be observed. Consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for the
necess
ary information. Failure
to follow these precautions
could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
Additional safety precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the opera-
tion of the supplemental restraint sys-
tem sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position may cause
the air bags to inflate.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning labels
Air bag warning labels are attached
to alert the passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
Be sure to read all of the information
about the air bags that are installed on
your vehicle in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety system of your vehicle
2-64
OOS037079L
Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-3
Remote key.........................................................................3-3
Smart key ............................................................................3-6
Immobilizer system .........................................................3-10
Door locks.............................................................3-11
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle .....3-11
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle ........3-12
Deadlocks..........................................................................3-14
Auto door lock/unlock features ................................3-15
Child-protector rear door locks..................................3-15
Theft-alarm system.............................................3-16
Steering wheel......................................................3-17
Electric power steering (EPS)......................................3-17
Tilt steering / Telescopic steering..............................3-17
Heated steering wheel...................................................3-18
Horn....................................................................................3-19
Mirrors...................................................................3-19
Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-19
Outside rearview mirror ................................................3-20
Windows ................................................................3-23
Power windows................................................................3-23
Sunroof..................................................................3-27
Sunroof opening and closing.......................................3-28
Sliding the sunroof .........................................................3-28
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-29
Sunshade...........................................................................3-29
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-30
Sunroof open warning...................................................3-30
Exterior features .................................................3-31
Hood ...................................................................................3-31
Tailgate...............................................................................3-32
Fuel filler door.................................................................3-34
Instrument cluster................................................3-37
Instrument cluster control ............................................3-38
Gauges and meters.........................................................3-38
Icy road warning light ..................................................3-41
Transmission shift indicator .........................................3-42
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-44
LCD display messages ..................................................3-57
LCD display (cluster type B,C) ...........................3-64
LCD display control.........................................................3-64
LCD display modes..........................................................3-65
Trip computer and service reminder
(for cluster type A) .............................................3-72
Trip computer...................................................................3-72
Service reminder .............................................................3-75
Trip computer (type B, type C)..........................3-77
Trip modes ........................................................................3-77
Head up display (HUD) ......................................3-80
3
Lighting..................................................................3-83
Exterior lights ..................................................................3-83
Low Beam Assist-Static light ......................................3-92
Welcome system ............................................................3-92
Interior lights....................................................................3-93
Wipers and washers ............................................3-95
Windshield wipers ..........................................................3-96
Windshield washers .......................................................3-97
Rear window wiper and washer switch ...................3-98
Driver assist system ............................................3-99
Rear view monitor...........................................................3-99
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system.........3-100
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward)
system..............................................................................3-104
Defroster.............................................................3-107
Rear window defroster ...............................................3-107
Manual climate control system........................3-108
Heating and air conditioning......................................3-109
System operation..........................................................3-112
System maintenance....................................................3-114
Automatic climate control system...................3-116
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-117
Manual heating and air conditioning.......................3-117
System operation..........................................................3-120
System maintenance....................................................3-122
Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-124
Manual climate control system .................................3-124
Automatic climate control system ............................3-125
Auto defogging system
(only for automatic climate control system) .........3-126
Climate control additional features.................3-127
Cluster ionizer................................................................3-127
Automatic ventilation ..................................................3-127
Sunroof inside air recirculation.................................3-127
Storage compartment........................................3-128
Center console storage ...............................................3-128
Glove box....................................................................... 3-128
Sunglass holder ............................................................3-129
Multi box ........................................................................3-129
Luggage tray .................................................................3-130
To increase luggage space .........................................3-130
Interior features ...............................................3-131
Cup holder.......................................................................3-131
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-132
Power outlet .................................................................3-132
Wireless cellular phone charging system ..............3-133
Clock.................................................................................3-135
Clothes hanger .............................................................3-135
Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................3-136
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-136
Cargo area cover .........................................................3-137
Exterior features ...............................................3-138
Roof rack .......................................................................3-138
3
3-3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Remote key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start
the engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Tailgate Unlock
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key.
3. The doors will lock. The hazard
warning lights will blink. Also, the
outside rearview mirror will fold, if
the outside rearview mirror folding
switch is in the AUTO position.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key.
2. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will unfold, if the outside rearview
mirror folding switch is in the
AUTO position.
Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Tailgate unlocking
To unlock:
1. Press the Tailgate Unlock button
(3) on the remote key for more
than one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Information
The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.
i
i
AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Unattended children
could place the key in the igni-
tion switch and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
OPDE046001
3-4
Convenient features of your vehicle
Start-up
For detailed information refer to “Key
Ignition Switch” in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction and may
void the vehicle warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
Remote key precautions
The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the remote
key.
NOTICE
NOTICE
■ Type A ■ Type B
OED036001A/OFD047002-A
■ Type C
OPDE046003
3-5
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the remote key does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the remote key, it is rec-
ommended that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the remote key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal could
be blocked by your mobile phone’s
normal operational signals.
This is specifically relevant when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the remote key and
your mobile phone in the same loca-
tion and always try to maintain an
adequate distance between the two
devices.
Information
Changes or modifications not express-
ly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will not
be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
block electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Battery replacement
If the remote key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Using a screw driver, remove the
battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery and insert
a new battery. Make sure the bat-
tery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the battery cover and key
cover in the reverse order of
removal.
If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not work-
ing correctly, it is recommended that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
i
NOTICE
i
OPD046002
3-6
Convenient features of your vehicle
Smart key (if equipped)
Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start
the engine.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Tailgate Unlock
Locking
To lock :
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
tailgate.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Lock button
(1) on the smart key.
3. The hazard warning lights will blink.
Also, the outside rearview mirror
will fold, if the outside rearview mir-
ror folding switch is in the AUTO
position.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.
Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle.
Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for
three seconds if any of the following
occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the tailgate is
open.
i
OPDE046044 OOS047001
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the Smart Key.
2. Either press the door handle but-
ton or press the Door Unlock but-
ton (2) on the smart key.
3. The doors will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
Information
• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is with-
in 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the out-
side door handle. Other people can
also open the doors without the
smart key in possession.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 sec-
onds unless a door is opened.
Tailgate unlocking
To unlock:
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Either press the tailgate handle
button or press the Tailgate Unlock
button (3) on the smart key for
more than one second.
3. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Information
• The Tailgate Unlock button (3) will
only unlock the tailgate. It will not
release the latch and open the tail-
gate automatically. If the Tailgate
Unlock button is used, someone
must still press the tailgate handle
button to open the tailgate.
• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-
gate will lock automatically after 30
seconds unless the tailgate is
opened.
ii
OOS047001
3-8
Convenient features of your vehicle
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the Engine
Start/Stop button in chapter 5.
To prevent damaging the smart
key:
• Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the smart key gets
damp (due to drinks or moisture),
or is heated, internal circuit may
malfunction and may void the
vehicle warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.
Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
Move the release lever in the direc-
tion of the arrow (1) and then remove
the mechanical key (2). Insert the
mechanical key into the key hole on
the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Loss of a smart key
A maximum of two smart keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key, it
is recommended that you should
immediately take the vehicle and
remaining key to your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle,
if necessary.
NOTICE
OPD046045
3-9
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Smart key precautions
The smart key may not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the trans-
mitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
If the smart key does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, it is rec-
ommended that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity to
your mobile phone, the signal could
be blocked by your mobile phone’s
normal operational signals. This is
specifically relevant when the phone
is active such as making and receiv-
ing calls, text messaging, and/or
sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and your
mobile phone in the same location
and always try to maintain an ade-
quate distance between the two
devices.
Information
Changes or modifications not express-
ly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. If
the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will not
be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.
Always have the smart key with
you when leaving the vehicle. If
the smart key is left near the vehi-
cle, the vehicle battery may be dis-
charged.
Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working prop-
erly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.
Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Use a slim tool to pry open the
rear cover of the smart key.
3. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
4. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OPDE046046
3-10
Convenient features of your vehicle
If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not work-
ing correctly, it is recommended that
you contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose of the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer sys-
tem indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then place the
ignition switch to the ON position
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.
The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, how-
ever you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer sys-
tem malfunction could occur.
NOTICE
i
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
WARNING
3-11
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
[A] : Lock, [B] : Unlock
Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
If you lock/unlock the driver's door with
a key, a driver’s door will lock/unlock
automatically.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Remote key
To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
To unlock the doors, press the Door
Unlock button (2) on the remote key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Smart key
To lock the doors, press the button on
the outside door handle while carry-
ing the smart key with you or press
the door lock button on the smart key.
DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS
OPDE046413
OOS047002
■ Remote key ■ Smart key
OOS047001
OPDE046004
3-12
Convenient features of your vehicle
To unlock the doors, press the button
on the outside door handle while car-
rying the smart key with you or press
the door unlock button on the smart
key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on the door
lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
key is in the ignition switch and any
front door is open.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
Information
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manu-
al) while simultaneously pulling on the
door handle.
Operate the other door locks and han-
dles, front and rear.
Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.
i
i
OOS047003
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
With the door handle
Front door
If the inner door handle is pulled when
the door is locked, the door will unlock
and open.
Rear door
If the inner door handle is pulled once
when the door is locked, the door will
unlock.
If the inner door handle is pulled once
more, the door will open.
With the central door
lock/unlock switch
When pressing the ( ) portion (2) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• If any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (2) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is opened, the doors
will not lock even though the lock
button (2) of the central door lock
switch is pressed.
When pressing the ( ) portion (1) of
the switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.
OOS047004
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle
in a crash is increased.
• Do not pull the inner door han-
dle of the driver’s or passen-
ger’s door while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.
WARNING
3-14
Convenient features of your vehicle
Deadlocks (if equipped)
Some vehicles are equipped with a
deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent
opening of a door from either inside
or outside the vehicle once the dead-
locks have been activated providing
an additional measure of vehicle
security.
To lock the vehicle using the dead-
lock function, the doors must be
locked by using the remote key or
smart key. To unlock the vehicle, the
transmitter or smart key must be
used again.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion (for dual clutch transmis-
sion) or first gear or R (Reverse,
for manual transaxle), engage
the parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position, close all windows,
lock all doors, and always take
the key with you.
WARNING
Do not lock the doors with the
remote key or the smart key with
anybody left in the vehicle. The
passenger in the vehicle cannot
unlock the doors with the door
lock button. For example, if the
door is locked with the remote
key, the passenger in the vehicle
cannot unlock the door without
the transmitter.
WARNING
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause dam-
age or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
WARNING
If you stay in the vehicle for a
long time while the weather is
very hot or cold, there are risks
of injuries or danger to life. Do
not lock the vehicle from the out-
side when someone is in the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-15
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Auto door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 15
km/h (9 mph).
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings mode on the LCD
display. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
Child-protector rear door locks
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors.The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open if the
inner door handle is pulled.
To lock the child safety lock, insert a
key (or screwdriver) (1) into the hole
and turn it to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.
OOS047005L
If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle. The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.
WARNING
3-16
Convenient features of your vehicle
This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occur:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The tailgate is opened without
using the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automati-
cally sets 30 seconds after you lock
the doors and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors and the tailgate from outside
the vehicle with the remote key or
smart key or by pressing the button
on the outside of the door handles
with the smart key in your posses-
sion.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.
Once the security system is set, open-
ing any door, the tailgate, or the hood
without using the remote key or smart
key will cause the alarm to activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the tailgate, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the tailgate, or
the doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.
Information
• Do not lock the doors until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with
the remote key or smart key, open
the doors by using the mechanical
key and place the ignition switch in
the ON position (for remote key) or
start the engine (for smart key) and
wait for 30 seconds.
• When the system is disarmed but a
door or tailgate is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
Information
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm
system will have a label attached to
the vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
i
i
TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM
OJC040170
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electric power steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Also, the steering effort becomes
heavier as the vehicle’s speed
increases and becomes lighter as
the vehicle’s speed decreases for
better control of the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate nor-
mally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate or blink on the instru-
ment cluster. The steering wheel
may become difficult to control
or operate. Take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked as
soon as possible.
• When abnormality is detected in
the electric power steering sys-
tem, to prevent a deadly acci-
dent, the steering assist function
will stop. At this time, the warn-
ing light turns on or blinks on
the cluster. The steering wheel
may become difficult to control
or operate. Have your vehicle
checked immediately, after mov-
ing the vehicle to a safe zone.
Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
This happens as the system per-
forms the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics are complet-
ed, the steering wheel will return to
its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON or LOCK/OFF
position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driv-
ing speed.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperatures, abnor-
mal noise may occur. If the temper-
ature rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if
you turn the steering wheel all the
way to the left or right continuously,
the steering wheel effort increases.
This is not a system malfunction. As
time passes, the steering wheel
effort will return to its normal con-
dition.
Tilt steering / Telescopic steering
i
NOTICE
SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL
Never adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control and cause
severe personal injury, death or
accidents.
WARNING
3-18
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
After adjustment, sometimes the lock-
release lever may not lock the steering
wheel.
It is not a malfunction. This occurs
when two gears are not engaged cor-
rectly. In this case, adjust the steering
wheel again and then lock the steering
wheel.
Pull down the lock-release lever (1) on
the steering wheel column and adjust
the steering wheel angle (2) and posi-
tion (3). Move the steering wheel, so it
points toward your chest, not toward
your face.
Make sure you can see the instrument
panel warning lights and gauges.
After adjusting, pull up the lock-
release lever (1) to lock the steering
wheel in place. Push the steering
wheel both up and down to be cer-
tain it is locked in position. Always
adjust the position of the steering
wheel before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running,
press the heated steering wheel but-
ton to warm the steering wheel.
The indicator on the button will illumi-
nate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again. The indicator
on the button will turn off.
Information
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 min-
utes after the heated steering wheel is
turned on.
Do not install any cover or acces-
sory on the steering wheel. This
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.
NOTICE
i
i
OOS047006
OOS047007
3-19
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel. The horn will operate
only when this area is pressed.
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.
Inside rearview mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to the center on the
view through the rear window.
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
[A] : Day/night lever, [B] : Day, [C] : Night
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OOS047008
NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
MMIIRRRROORRSS
Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear head-
rests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.
WARNING
To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.
WARNING
OOS047009
3-20
Convenient features of your vehicle
Pull the day/night lever towards you
to reduce glare from the headlamps
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lamp of the vehicle behind you in
nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror. The sensor detects the light
level around the vehicle, and auto-
matically adjusts to control the head-
lamp glare from vehicles behind you.
Whenever the shift lever is placed in
R (Reverse), the mirror will automat-
ically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the driver’s view
behind the vehicle.
[A] : Indicator
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlamp of the car behind you in
nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions. When the engine is running,
the glare is automatically controlled
by the sensor mounted in the
rearview mirror. The sensor detects
the light level around the vehicle, and
automatically adjusts to control the
headlamp glare from vehicles behind
you. Whenever the shift lever is
placed in R (Reverse), the mirror will
automatically go to the brightest set-
ting in order to improve the drivers
view behind the vehicle.
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors.
NOTICE
OOS047010L
OOS047012
3-21
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The mirror can be adjusted remotely
with the remote switch.
The mirror heads can be folded to
prevent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
• Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved spray
de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)
spray, or a sponge or soft cloth
with very warm water, or move
the vehicle to a warm place and
allow the ice to melt.
Adjusting the rearview mirrors
1. Press either the L (left side) or R
(right side) button (1) to select the
rearview mirror you would like to
adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
(2) to position the selected mirror
up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button
into neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.
NOTICE
• The right outside rearview mir-
ror is convex. In some coun-
tries, the left outside rearview
mirror is also convex. Objects
seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or turn your head and
look to determine the actual
distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while driving.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
OOS047013
3-22
Convenient features of your vehicle
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand
otherwise the motor may be
damaged.
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Electric type
Left : The mirror will unfold.
Right : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO) : The mirror will fold
or unfold automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the remote key and “Welcome
mirror” in the User Setting Mode
on the LCD display is activated.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key and “Welcome mir-
ror” in the User Setting Mode on
the LCD display is activated.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the button on the outside door
handle and “Welcome mirror” in
the User Setting Mode on the
LCD display is activated.
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unnec-
essary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than
necessary while the engine is not
running.
Do not fold the electric type out-
side rearview mirror by hand. It
could cause motor failure.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
OOS047014
OOS047015
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Power windows (if equipped)
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch*
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window*
(7) Power window lock switch
* : if equipped
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows. Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door's
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or OFF position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the Power
Windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
WWIINNDDOOWWSS
OOS047017
3-24
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
• In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demon-
strate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately 2.5 cm.
If you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly close the sun-
roof.
Window opening and closing
To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the win-
dow switch when you want the win-
dow to stop.
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up or press down
and release the switch.
Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
i
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.
WARNING
OOS047018
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, it is recom-
mended that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If a window senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
stop and lower approximately 30 cm
(12 inches) to allow the object to be
cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 inch).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 sec-
onds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reverse fea-
ture, the automatic window reverse
will not operate.
Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “Auto Up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.
Do not install any accessories on
the windows. The automatic
reverse feature may not operate.
NOTICE
i
OLF044032
The automatic reverse feature
doesn’t activate while resetting
power window system. Make
sure body parts or other objects
are safely out of the way before
closing the windows to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage.
WARNING
Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 4 mm (0.16
inch) in diameter caught between
the window glass and the upper
window channel may not be
detected by the automatic reverse
window and the window will not
stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
3-26
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power window lock switch
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
• The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passengers'
power window.
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
NOTICE
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional win-
dow operation by a child.
WARNING
OOS047019
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
• NEVER leave any child unat-
tended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inad-
vertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion (pressed). Serious injury
can result from unintentional
window operation by the child.
• Do not extend your head,
arms or body outside the win-
dows while driving.
WARNING
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control
switch located on the overhead con-
sole.
The sunroof can be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK/OFF position.
However, if the front door is opened,
the sunroof cannot be operated even
within 30 seconds.
Information
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
• Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is open, rain or
snow may leak through the sun-
roof and wet the interior as well
as allow theft.
NOTICE
i
SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS047021
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or objects are out of the
way before using the sunroof.
• Do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the sunroof
while driving, to avoid serious
injury.
• Do not leave the engine run-
ning and the key in your vehi-
cle with unsupervised children.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Unattended children could
operate the sunroof, which
could result in serious injury.
• Do not sit on the top of the
vehicle. It may cause injuries or
vehicle damage.
WARNING
3-28
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunroof opening and closing
To open:
Press the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the first detent position.
Release the switch when you want
the sunroof to stop.
To close:
Press the sunroof control lever forward
to the first detent position. Release the
switch when you want the sunroof to
stop.
Sliding the sunroof
Pressing the sunroof control lever
backward or forward momentarily to
the second detent position completely
opens or closes the sunroof even
when the switch is released. To stop
the sunroof at the desired position
while the sunroof is in operation, press
the sunroof control lever backward or
forward and release the switch.
Information
To reduce wind noise while driving, it
is recommended that you drive with
the sunroof slightly closed (stop the
sunroof about 7 cm before the maxi-
mum slide open position).
Automatic reverse (if equipped)
If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a small obstacle is between
the sliding glass and the sunroof
sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
i
OLFC044035CNOOS047022
3-29
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Tilting the sunroof
Tilt the sunroof open:
Push the sunroof control lever
upward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
To close the sunroof:
Press the sunroof lever forward until
the sunroof moves to the desired
position.
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sun-
roof and roof panel, which can
make a noise.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, other-
wise the motor could be dam-
aged. In cold and wet climates, the
sunroof may not work properly.
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatical-
ly with the sunroof when the glass
panel moves. If you want it closed,
move the sunshade manually.
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OAD045037
OOS047023
Small objects that can get
caught between the sunroof
glass and the front glass chan-
nel may not be detected by the
automatic reverse system. In
this case, the sunroof glass will
not detect the object and will not
reverse direction.
WARNING
3-30
Convenient features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
The sunroof may need to be reset if
the following conditions occur:
- The battery is discharged or dis-
connected or the sunroof fuse has
been replaced or disconnected
- The sunroof control lever is not
operating correctly
To reset the sunroof, perform the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. It is
recommended to reset the sunroof
while the engine is running.
2. Push the control lever forward.The
sunroof will close completely or tilt
depending on the condition of the
sunroof.
3. Release the control lever until the
sunroof does not move.
4. Push the control lever forward
about 10 seconds.
- When the sunroof is in the close
position :
The glass will tilt and slightly
move up and down.
- When the sunroof is in the tilt
position:
The glass will slightly move up
and down.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, try again from step 2.
5. Within 3 seconds, push the control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:
Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide
Close.
Do not release the lever until the
operation is completed.
If you release the lever during opera-
tion, try again from step 2.
6. Release the sunroof control lever
after all operation has completed.
(The sunroof system has been
reset.)
Information
• If the sunroof does not reset when
the vehicle battery is disconnected
or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, the sunroof may not operate
normally.
• For more detailed information, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
• If the driver turns off the engine when
the sunroof is not fully closed, the
warning chime will sound for approx-
imately 3 seconds and the open sun-
roof warning appear on the LCD dis-
play.
• If the driver turns off the engine and
opens the door when the sunroof is
not fully closed, the open sunroof
warning will appear on the LCD dis-
play until the door is closed or the
sunroof is fully closed.
Close the sunroof securely when leav-
ing your vehicle.
i
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Hood
Opening the hood
1. Park the vehicle and set the park-
ing brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the second-
ary latch up (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
4. Pull out the support rod.
5. Hold the hood open with the sup-
port rod (1).
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
OOS047024
OOS047025
• Grasp the support rod in the
area wrapped in rubber. The
rubber will help prevent you
from being burned by hot
metal when the engine is hot.
• The support rod must be
inserted completely into the
hole provided whenever you
inspect the engine compart-
ment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possi-
bly injuring you.
WARNING
OOS047026
3-32
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Lower the hood halfway (lifted
approximately 30cm from the
closed position) and push down to
securely lock in place. Then double
check to be sure the hood is secure.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is
not securely locked. Open it again
and close it with more force.
Tailgate
Opening the tailgate
Make sure the vehicle is in P (Park)
and set the parking brake.
Then do one of the following:
1. Unlock all doors with the Door
Unlock button on your remote key or
smart key. Press the tailgate handle
button and open the tailgate.
2. Press and hold the Tailgate Unlock
button on the remote key or smart
key. Press the tailgate handle but-
ton and open the tailgate.
3. With the Smart Key in your pos-
session, press the tailgate handle
button and open the tailgate.
Closing the tailgate
Lower the tailgate lid and press down
until it locks. To be sure the tailgate
lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again
without pressing the tailgate handle
button.
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around the
hood opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away.
Check there is no hood open
warning light or message dis-
played on the instrument clus-
ter. If the hood is not latched
while the vehicle is moving, the
chime will sound to warn the
driver the hood is not fully
latched. Driving with the hood
opened may cause a total loss
of visibility, which might result
in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed,
which might result in an acci-
dent, and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
WARNING
OOS047027
OOS047028
3-33
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Information
To prevent damage to the tailgate lift
cylinders and the attached hardware,
always close the tailgate before driv-
ing.
In cold and wet climates, tailgate
lock and tailgate mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
NOTICE
i
Always keep the tailgate lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
Do not hold the part (gas lifter)
that supports the tailgate. Be
aware that the deformation of the
part may cause vehicle damage
and a risk of safety accident.
WARNING
OOS047085
• NEVER allow anyone to occu-
py the luggage compartment of
the vehicle at any time. If the
tailgate is partially or totally
latched and the person is
unable to get out, serious
injury or death could occur due
to lack of ventilation, exhaust
fumes and rapid heat build-up,
or because of exposure to cold
weather conditions. The lug-
gage compartment is also a
highly dangerous location in
the event of a crash because it
is not a protected occupant
space but is a part of the vehi-
cle’s crush zone.
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and keys should be
kept out of the reach of chil-
dren. Parents should teach
their children about the dan-
gers of playing in luggage
compartments.
WARNING
3-34
Convenient features of your vehicle
Emergency tailgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadver-
tently locked in the luggage compart-
ment. The tailgate can be opened by
doing as follows:
1. Insert the key into the hole.
2. Push the release lever to the right
by a key.
3. Push up the tailgate.
Fuel filler door
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
on the fuel-filler door opener.
1. Turn the engine off.
2. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
fuel filler door opener up.
OOS047086
OOS047029
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emer-
gency tailgate safety release
lever in the vehicle and how to
open the tailgate if you are acci-
dentally locked in the luggage
compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compart-
ment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pres-
sure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.
Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved de-
icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-
freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it “clicks” one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.
Information
The fuel filler door will not close if the
driver's door is locked. If you lock the
driver's door while fueling, unlock it
before closing the fuel filler door.
i
i
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. You can generate a build-
up of static electricity by touch-
ing, rubbing or sliding against
any item or fabric capable of
producing static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors causing a
fire. If you must re-enter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
OOS047031
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
WARNING
3-36
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted sur-
faces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.
NOTICE
i
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
•
When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position (for
dual clutch trans-
mission) or first gear or R
(Reverse, for manual transmis-
sion), set the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position. Sparks pro-
duced by electrical components
related to the engine can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact between
your bare hand and the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
OOS047100L/OOS047101L/OOS047102L
■■
Type A
■■
Type C
■
■
Type B
IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges and Meters" in
this chapter.
3-38
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument cluster control
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle's position lights or
headlamps are on, press the illumi-
nation control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination con-
trol button, the interior switch illumi-
nation intensity is also adjusted.
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches the maxi-
mum or minimum level, an alarm
will sound.
Gauges and meters
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in kilometers per hour (km/h) and/or
miles per hour (MPH).
OOS047120
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. This could
result in loss of control and lead
to an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or vehicle
damage.
WARNING
■ Type B, C
■ Type A
OGC044138/OPDE046110
OOS047103L/OOS047126
■ MPH, km/h
■ km/h
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “130 or H” position, it
indicates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.
Fuel gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
NOTICE
NOTICE
OOS047104L
■ Gasoline engine
OOS047106/OOS047106L
■ For Europe■ Except Europe
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could cause severe burns.
Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
WARNING
OOS047107/OOS047107L
■ For Europe
■ Except Europe
3-40
Convenient features of your vehicle
Information
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire
damaging the catalytic converter.
Outside temperature gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures either in
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit.
- Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C
(-104°F ~ 140°F)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not immediately change
like a general thermometer not to
distract the driver.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by:
- User Settings mode in the Cluster :
You can change the temperature
unit in the “Other Features -
Temperature unit” .
- Automatic climate control system :
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds or more.
The temperature unit of the instrument
cluster and climate control system will
change at once.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
NOTICE
i
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “0 or
E(Empty)” level.
WARNING
OPDE046140
OPDE046141
3-41
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Distance to empty
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The distance to empty may vary sig-
nificantly based on driving condi-
tions, driving habits, and condition
of the vehicle.
Icy road warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the out-
side temperature gauge is approxi-
mately below 4°C (40°F), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks 10 times,
and then illuminates. Also, the warn-
ing chime sounds 3 times.
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
i
i
OPD046138
OTLE045132
3-42
Convenient features of your vehicle
Transmission shift indicator
Manual transmission shift indi-
cator (if equipped)
This indicator informs which gear is
recommended while driving, to save
fuel.
• Shifting up :
▲
2,
▲
3,
▲
4,
▲
5,
▲
6
• Shifting down :
▼
1,
▼
2,
▼
3,
▼
4,
▼
5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is recommended (cur-
rently the shift lever is in the
2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is recommended
(currently the shift lever is in the
4th, 5th, or 6th gear).
When the system is not working prop-
erly, the indicator is not displayed.
Dual clutch transmission shift
indicator (if equipped)
This indicator displays which shift
lever position is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Manual shift mode : D1, D2, D3, D4,
D5, D6, D7
OPDE046142
OTL045132
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Shift Indicator Pop-up (if equipped)
The pop-up that indicates the current
gear position is displayed in the clus-
ter for about 2 seconds when shifting
into other positions (P/R/N/D).
Dual clutch transmission shift
indicator (for Europe, if equipped)
In the manual shift mode, this indica-
tor informs which gear is desired
while driving to save fuel.
• Dual clutch transmission shift indi-
cator
- Shifting up :
▲
2,
▲
3,
▲
4,
▲
5,
▲
6
▲
7
- Shifting down :
▼
1,
▼
2,
▼
3,
▼
4,
▼
5,
▼
6
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or
1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th,
5th, or 6th gear).
When the system is not working
properly, the indicator is not dis-
played.
OTL045134
OPDE046142
3-44
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning and indicator lights
Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situa-
tion that needs attention.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you turn the ignition switch
or the Engine Start/Stop button to
the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to “Seat
Belts” in chapter 2.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is low.
i
3-45
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
If the brake fluid level in the reser-
voir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in
chapter 7). After adding brake
fluid, check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is
found, or if the warning light
remains on, or if the brakes do not
operate properly, do not drive the
vehicle. We recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
3-46
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
- Electronic
Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, we recommend you have
the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
i
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
We recommend you have the
vehicle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNING
3-47
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to
the emission control system which
could affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
- Gasoline Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-
ic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-48
Convenient features of your vehicle
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7).
If the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine Oil
Pressure Warning Light is illumi-
nated, severe damage could
result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be seri-
ous engine damage or malfunc-
tion. In this case:
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check
the oil level. If the oil level is
low, fill the engine oil to the
proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after the
engine is started, turn the
engine off immediately. In this
case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Engine Oil Level
Warning Light
(if equipped)
The engine oil level warning light illumi-
nates when the engine oil level should be
checked.
If the warning light comes on, check the
engine oil level as soon as possible and
add engine oil as required.
Slowly pour the recommended oil little by
little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :
approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to "Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities" in chapter 8.)
Do not overfill the engine oil. Make sure
the oil level is not above F (Full) mark on
the dipstick.
Information
• If you travel approximately 50 km
~100 km after the engine warms up,
after adding the engine oil, the
warning light will go off.
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3
times within 10 seconds, the warning
light will go off immediately. However,
when you turn off the warning light
without adding the engine oil, the light
will come on again after traveling
approximately 50 ~ 100 km after the
engine warms up.
If the light comes on continuously
after adding the engine oil and trav-
elling approximately 50~100 km after
the engine warms up, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Even if this light doesn't come on
after the engine has started, the
engine oil should be checked and
supplied periodically.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0” can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
Overspeed Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• When you drive the vehicle more
than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime
also sound for approximately 5
seconds.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
120
km/h
3-50
Convenient features of your vehicle
Master Warning Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction in the
below systems.
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
(if equipped)
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS, if equipped)
To identify the details of the warn-
ing, look at the LCD display.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tires
are displayed on the LCD display).
For more details, refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 sec-
onds or repeatedly blinks on and
off at approximately 3 second inter-
vals:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
For more details, refer to
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
4 Wheel Drive (4WD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the 4WD system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)”in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately
3 seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)”in chapter 5.
3-52
Convenient features of your vehicle
AUTO STOP Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the engine enters the Idle
Stop mode of the ISG (Idle Stop and
Go) system.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the automatic starting occurs,
the AUTO STOP indicator on the
cluster will blink for 5 seconds.
For more details, refer to the “ISG
(Idle Stop and Go) system” in chap-
ter 5.
Information
When the engine automatically starts
by the ISG system, some warning
lights(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or
Parking brake warning light) may
turn on for a few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system
has malfunctioned.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (without smart key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in the key with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (with smart key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle with the
Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC or ON position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine.
i
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and the Engine Start/Stop button is
ON, but the vehicle cannot detect
the smart key.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery voltage of the
smart key is low.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the
Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key. (For more details,
refer to "Starting the Engine"
in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you operate the turn signals.
If any of the following occur, there may
be a malfunction with the turn signal
system.
- The turn signal indicator light illumi-
nates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light blinks
rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light does
not illuminate at all
If any of these conditions occur, we
recommend that you have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Beam Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlamps are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
3-54
Convenient features of your vehicle
High Beam Assist
(HBA) indicator light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the high-beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the High Beam
Assist (HBA) system will switch the
high beam to low beam automati-
cally.
For more details, refer to "High
Beam Assist (HBA)" in this chap-
ter.
Light ON Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlamps
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Rear Fog Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the rear fog lights are on.
LED Headlamp Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When you turn the ignition switch
or the Engine Start/Stop button to
the ON position.
• When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlamp.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with a
LED headlamp related part.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Continuous driving with the LED
Headlamp Warning Light on or
blinking can reduce LED head-
lamp life.
NOTICE
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
4 Wheel Drive (4WD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select 4WD Lock mode
by pressing the 4WD LOCK button.
- The 4WD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it can
cause noise, vibration or damage
of 4WD related parts.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more details, refer to "Cruise
Control System" in chapter 5.
Speed Limiter Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates
when:
• When the speed limiter is enabled.
For more details, refer to "Speed
Limit Control System" in chapter
5.
NOTICE
3-56
Convenient features of your vehicle
Downhill Brake Control
(DBC) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you activate the DBC sys-
tem by pressing the DBC button.
This warning light blinks:
• When the DBC is operating.
This warning light illuminates yellow:
• When there is a malfunction with
the DBC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to “Downhill
Brake Control (DBC) System” in
chapter 5.
SPORT Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates
• When you select "SPORT" mode
as drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in chapter 5.
ECO Mode Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates
• When you select "ECO" mode as
drive mode.
For more details, refer to "Drive
Mode Integrated Control System"
in chapter 5.
Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA)
system warning light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the FCA.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) system indica-
tor light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When the system operat-
ing conditions are satisfied.
• [White] The system operating con-
ditions are not satisfied.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane keeping assist
system.
In this case, we recommend you to
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Lane
Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in
chapter 5.
Icy Road Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy.
When the temperature on the out-
side temperature gauge is approxi-
mately below 4°C (40°F), the Icy
Road Warning Light and Outside
Temperature Gauge blinks and then
illuminates. Also, the warning chime
sounds 1 time.
Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
LCD display messages
Shift to P (for smart key system
and dual clutch transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton once more, it will turn to the ON
position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the battery of the smart key is dis-
charged while changing the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF position.
i
3-58
Convenient features of your vehicle
Press START button while turn-
ing wheel (for smart key sys-
tem)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not unlock
normally when the Engine Start/Stop
button is pressed.
You should press the Engine Start/Stop
button while turning the steering wheel
right and left.
Steering wheel not locked
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel is not locked while
the Engine Start/Stop button changes
to the OFF position.
Check Steering Wheel Lock
System (for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally while the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton changes to the OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system and dual
clutch transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button changes
to the ACC position twice by pressing
the button repeatedly without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
You can start the vehicle by depressing
the brake pedal.
Press clutch pedal to start
engine (for smart key system
and manual transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the Engine Start/Stop button is in the
ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing
the clutch pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal to start the
engine.
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you open or close door in the
ACC position or ON position. The
warning sound is heard when you
close door without a smart key in
vehicle.
When attempting to start the vehicle
always have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when you
press the Engine Start/Stop button.
3-59
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Press START button with key
(for smart key system)
This warning message is displayed if
you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton while the warning message “Key
not detected” is displayed.
At this time, the immobilizer indicator
light blinks.
Press START button again
(for smart key system)
This message is displayed if you
were unable to start the vehicle when
the Engine Start/Stop button was
pressed.
If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button again.
If the warning message appears
each time you press the Engine
Start/Stop button, we recommend
that you have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse
(for smart key system and dual
clutch transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
You need to replace the fuse with a
new one. If that is not possible, you
can start the engine by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button for 10 sec-
onds in the ACC position.
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system and dual
clutch transmission)
This warning message is displayed if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
Information
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
i
3-60
Convenient features of your vehicle
Door, Hood, Tailgate open
This warning is displayed indicating
which door, or hood, or tailgate is
open.
Sunroof open (if equipped)
This warning is displayed if you turn
off the engine when the sunroof is
open.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
Lights mode
This indicator displays which exterior
light is selected using the lighting
control.
Before driving the vehicle, you
should confirm that the door/
hood/tailgate is fully closed.
Also, check there is no door/
hood/tailgate open warning
light or message displayed on
the instrument cluster.
CAUTION
OOS047112 OOS047113 OPDE046120
3-61
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Wiper mode
This indicator displays which wiper
speed is selected using the wiper
control.
Low Pressure (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corre-
sponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.
For more details, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)"
in chapter 6.
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
This warning message is displayed if
the fuse switch located on the fuse
box under the steering wheel is OFF.
You should turn the fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses”
in chapter 7.
OPDE046119OOS047115LOPDE046125/OPDE046126
■ Front ■ Rear
3-62
Convenient features of your vehicle
Heated Steering Wheel turned
off (if equipped)
This message is displayed if you turn
off the heated steering wheel.
For more details, refer to “Heated
Steering Wheel” in this chapter.
Low washer fluid (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed
if the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
Have the washer fluid reservoir
refilled.
Low fuel
This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Engine has overheated
(if equipped)
This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
Check headlight (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
the headlamps are not operating
properly. A headlamp bulb may need
to be replaced.
Information
Make sure to replace the burned out
bulb with a new one of the same wattage
rating.
Check High Beam Assist (HBA)
system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the High
Beam Assist (HBA) System. We rec-
ommend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
“High Beam Assist (HBA) System”
in chapter 3.
i
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Check FCA system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a malfunction with the
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system. We recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to "Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)
system" in chapter 5.
Check Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Driver
Attention Warning (DAW) system. We
recommend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
“Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system” in chapter 5.
Check Forward Collision
Warning system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) system. We
recommend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
System" in chapter 5.
Check Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) system (if equipped)
This warning message is displayed if
there is a problem with the Lane
Keeping Assist (LKA) system. We
recommend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
“Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-
tem” in chapter 5.
3-64
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD display control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) , : MOVE switch for
changing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY ((CCLLUUSSTTEERR TTYYPPEE BB,,CC))
OOS047038
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
LCD display modes
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information such as the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.
Assist
This mode displays the state of :
- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system
- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system
- Tire pressure
For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system”, “Driver
Attention Warning (DAW) system” in chapter 5 and "Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.
Warning This mode displays warning messages related to the Cruise system, etc.
The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.
3-66
Convenient features of your vehicle
Shift to P to edit settings /
Engage parking brake to edit
settings
This warning message illuminates if
you try to select an item from the
User Settings mode while driving.
- Manual transmission
For your safety, change the User
Settings after engaging the parking
brake.
- Dual clutch transmission
For your safety, change the User
Settings after parking the vehicle,
applying the parking brake and
moving the shift lever to P (Park).
Quick guide (Help, if equipped)
This mode provides quick guides for
the systems in the User Settings
mode.
Select an item, press and hold the
OK button.
For more details about each sys-
tem, refer to this Owner’s Manual.
Trip computer mode
The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including fuel economy,
tripmeter information and vehicle
speed.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
OPDE046131 OPDE046147
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Assist mode
LKA/DAW
This mode displays the state of the
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system
and Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system.
For more information, refer to
each system information in chap-
ter 5.
Tire Pressure
This mode displays information relat-
ed to Tire Pressure.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)“ in chapter 6.
Warning message mode
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
LCD display for several seconds.
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Exterior lamp malfunction
(if equipped)
- Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system malfunction
(if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS, if equipped)
- High Beam Assist (HBA) malfunc-
tion (if equipped)
- Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) malfunction
(if equipped)
OOS047118L
OOS047119L
3-68
Convenient features of your vehicle
User settings mode
In this mode, you can change the
settings of the instrument cluster,
doors, lamps, etc.
1. Head-up display (if equipped)
2. Driver Assistance
3. Door
4. Lights
5. Sound
6. Convenience
7. Service interval
8. Other Features
9. Languages
10. Reset
The information provided may dif-
fer depending on which functions
are applicable to your vehicle.
1. Head Up display (if equipped)
• Display Height
- Adjust the height of the HUD
image on the display.
• Rotation
- Adjust the angle of the image.
• Brightness
- Adjust the intensity of the HUD
illumination.
• Content Select
- Tu r n by Tur n
- Traffic information
- Cruise control
- Lane keeping assist (LKA) sys-
tem
- Blind-spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system
• Speedometer Size
- Choose the speedometer font
size of the HUD. (Large, Medium,
Small)
• Speedometer Color
- Choose the speedometer font
color of the HUD. (White, Orange,
Green)
2. Driver Assistance
• Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system
- Off/Normal Sensitivity/
High Sensitivity
To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver
Attention Warning (DAW).
For more information, refer to the
"Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system " in chapter 5.
• Lane Safety
- Lane Departure Warning
- Standard LKA
- Active LKA
To adjust the Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) function.
For more information, refer to the
"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-
tem " in chapter 5.
• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist
To activate or deactivate the Forward
Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA).
For more information, refer to the
"Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Forward Collision Warning
- Late/Normal/Early
To adjust the initial warning alert time
for Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system.
For more information, refer to
"Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.
• Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
sound
To activate or deactivate the Blind-
Spot Collision Warning (BCW) sound.
For more information, refer to "
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system" in chapter 5.
• Blind-Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
To activate or deactivate the Blind-
Spot Collision Warning (BCW) sys-
tem.
For more information, refer to
"Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system" in chapter 5.
3. Door
• Auto Lock
- Disable: The auto door lock opera-
tion will be canceled.
- Enable on Speed: All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehi-
cle speed exceeds 15km/h
(9.3mph).
- Enable on Shift: All doors will be
automatically locked if the dual
clutch transmission shift lever is
shifted from the P (Park) position to
the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D
(Drive) position.
• Auto Unlock
- Disable: The auto door unlock oper-
ation will be canceled.
- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the
Engine Star/Stop button is set to
the OFF position. (if equipped with
smart key)
- On Key Out: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked when the igni-
tion key is removed from the igni-
tion switch. (if equipped with remote
key)
- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-
matically unlocked if the dual clutch
transmission shift lever is shifted to
the P (Park) position.
- Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be
automatically unlocked when the
driver’s door is opened.
• Horn Feedback
To activate or deactivate the horn
feedback.
If the horn feedback is activated,
after locking the door by pressing the
lock button on the remote key, and
pressing it again within 4 seconds,
the horn feedback sound will operate
once to indicate that all doors are
locked. (if equipped with remote key)
3-70
Convenient features of your vehicle
4. Lights
• One Touch Turn Signal
- Off: The one touch turn signal func-
tion will be deactivated.
- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-
cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter.
• Head Lamp Delay
To activate or deactivate the head-
lamp delay function.
For more information, refer to
"Light" in this chapter
5. Sound
• Park Assist System Volume
- Softer/Louder
To adjust the Park Assist System
volume.
• Welcome Sound
To activate or deactivate the wel-
come sound.
6. Convenience
• Welcome mirror
To activate or deactivate the wel-
come mirror function.
When all the doors (and tailgate) are
closed and locked, the outside mirror
will unfold if any of the below is per-
formed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed with the
smart key in possession.
• Wiper/Lights Display
To activate or deactivate the Wiper/
Light mode.
When activated, the LCD display
shows the selected Wiper/Light
mode whenever you changed the
mode.
• Auto Rear Wiper (reverse)
To activate or deactivate the rear
wiper while the vehicle is in reverse
with the front wiper ON.
• Gear Position Pop-up
To activate or deactivate the gear
position pop-up.
When activated, the gear position
will be displayed on the LCD display.
(if equipped with dual clutch trans-
mission)
• Icy Road Warning
To activate or deactivate the Icy
Road Warning function.
3-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
7. Service Interval
• Service Interval
To activate or deactivate the service
interval function.
• Adjust Interval
If the service interval menu is acti-
vated, you may adjust the time and
distance.
Information
To use the service interval menu, con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the service interval is activated and
the time and distance is adjusted,
messages are displayed in the fol-
lowing situations each time the vehi-
cle is turned on.
- Service in
: Displayed to inform the driver the
remaining mileage and days to
service.
- Service required
: Displayed when the mileage and
days to service has been reached
or passed.
Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
8. Other Features
• Fuel Economy Auto Reset
- Off: The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever
refueling.
- After Ignition: When the engine has
been OFF for 4 hours or longer the
average fuel economy will reset
automatically.
- After Refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
after adding 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of
fuel or more and after driving speed
exceeds 1 km/h (1 mph).
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.
• Fuel Economy Unit
To select the fuel economy unit.
(km/L, L/100, MPG)
• Temperature Unit
To select the temperature unit.
(°C,°F)
• Tire Pressure Unit
To select the tire pressure unit.
(psi, kPa, bar)
9. Language
Choose the language.
10. Reset
You can reset the menus in the User
Settings Mode. All menus in the User
Settings Mode are reset to factory
settings, except language and serv-
ice interval.
i
i
3-72
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, press the
TRIP button on the steering wheel.
i
TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR AANNDD SSEERRVVIICCEE RREEMMIINNDDEERR ((FFOORR CCLLUUSSTTEERR TTYYPPEE AA))
Convenient features of your vehicle
- Distance to empty
- Average fuel economy
- Instant fuel economy
- Tripmeter A
- Driving time
- Average vehicle speed
- Tripmeter B
- Driving time
- Average vehicle speed
Vehicle speed ON/OFF
OOS047089L
■ Type A
OOS047090L
■ Type B
3-73
Convenient features of your vehicle
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
• If the estimated distance is below
1 km, the trip computer will display
"----" as distance to empty.
Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been inter-
rupted, the distance to empty func-
tion may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters of
fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
• To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the RESET button
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
fuel economy is displayed.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instanta-
neous fuel economy while driving
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 10 km/h.
i
3
OOS047128L
3-74
Tripmeter A/B (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Elapsed Time (2)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
RESET button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
counted while the engine is still run-
ning (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)
Average Vehicle Speed (3)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the RESET button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
Information
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 300 meters or the driving time is
less than 10 seconds since the ignition
switch is turned ON.
• The average vehicle speed will con-
tinue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traf-
fic or stopped at a stop light.)
i
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OOS047129L
3-75
Convenient features of your vehicle
Digital speedometer ON/OFF
The digital speedometer can be
turned on and off.
To turn on the digital speedometer,
press the RESET button on the steer-
ing wheel for more than one second
when “SPEED OFF” is displayed. To
turn off the digital speedometer, press
the RESET button for more than one
second when “SPEED ON” is dis-
played.
This message shows the speed of the
vehicle when the digital speedometer
is turned on.
Service reminder
If the remaining mileage or days is
below 1,500 km or 30 days, the serv-
ice reminder will be displayed with a
warning sound for a few seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
to the ON position.
Information
To change or deactivate the service
interval, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
3
OAD045180N
OOS047132L
OOS047133LOOS047130L/OOS047131L
3-76
If one of the specified service interval
(mileage or days) reaches “0”, the
service symbol ( ) will blink for a
few seconds each time you turn ON
the vehicle.
If you exceed the specified service
interval, the service symbol ( ) will
blink for a few seconds each time you
turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval, press the
RESET button for more than 5 sec-
onds and then when the km (miles)
and days blink press the RESET but-
ton for more than 1 second.
If the service interval is not set, the
service symbol ( ) will not be dis-
played.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OOS047134L OOS047135L
3-77
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
Information
Some driving information stored in the
trip computer (for example Average
Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is
disconnected.
Trip modes
To change the trip mode, toggle the
“ , ” switch on the steering wheel.
i
TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR ((TTYYPPEE BB,, TTYYPPEE CC))
• Tripmeter
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Drive Info
• Tripmeter
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Accumulated Info
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Digital Speedometer
OOS047038
3-78
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fuel economy
Average Fuel Economy (1)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the [OK] button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel econo-
my is displayed.
Automatic reset
To automatically reset the average
fuel economy after refueling, select
the "Auto Reset" mode in the User
Settings menu on the LCD display.
- After Ignition: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
whenever it has passed 4 hours
after turning OFF the engine.
- After Refueling: The average fuel
economy will reset automatically
when driving speed exceeds 1
km/h, after adding 6 liters (1.6 gal-
lons) of fuel or more.
Information
The average fuel economy may be
inaccurate, when the vehicle drives
shorter than 300 meters (0.19 miles)
after turning ON the Engine Start/Stop
button.
Instant Fuel Economy (2)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
Accumulated Info display
This display shows the accumulated
trip distance (1), the average fuel
economy (2), and the total driving
time (3).
The information is accumulated
starting from the last reset.
To manually reset the information,
press and hold the OK button when
viewing the Accumulated driving info.
The trip distance, the average fuel
economy, and total driving time will
reset simultaneously.
i
OPDE046131/OPDE046132
■ Type A ■ Type B
OPDE046133/OPDE046134
■ Type A ■ Type B
3-79
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The accumulated driving information
will continue to be counted while the
engine is still running (for example,
when the vehicle is in traffic or
stopped at a stop light).
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalcu-
lated.
Drive Info display
This display shows the trip distance
(1), the average fuel economy (2),
and the total driving time (3).
The information is combined for each
ignition cycle. However, when the
engine has been OFF for 4 hours or
longer the Drive Info screen will reset.
To manually reset the information,
press and hold the OK button when
viewing the Drive Info. The trip dis-
tance, the average fuel economy, and
total driving time will reset simultane-
ously.
The driving information will continue
to be counted while the engine is still
running (for example, when the vehi-
cle is in traffic or stopped at a stop
light.)
Information
The vehicle must be driven for a min-
imum of 300 meters (0.19 miles) since
the last ignition key cycle before the
average fuel economy will be recalcu-
lated.
Digital Speedometer
This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (km/h, MPH).
i
i
OPDE046135/OPDE046136
■ Type A ■ Type B
OPDE046145/OPDE046146
■ Type A ■ Type B
3-80
HHEEAADD UUPP DDIISSPPLLAAYY ((HHUUDD)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Convenient features of your vehicle
The head up display is a transparent
display which projects a shadow of
some information of the instrument
cluster and navigation on the display
located on the crash pad.
Precautions while using the
head up display
It may be difficult to read information
on the head up display in the follow-
ing situations.
- The driver is improperly positioned
in the driver’s seat.
- The driver wears polarizing-filter
sunglasses.
- An object is located above the
head up display cover.
- The vehicle is driven on a wet road.
- Any improper lighting accessory is
installed inside the vehicle, or there
is incoming light from outside of
the vehicle.
- The driver wears glasses.
- The driver wears contact lenses.
When it is difficult to read the head
up display information, adjust the
head up display angle or the head up
display brightness level in the User
Settings Mode. For more information,
refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter.
OOS047079
• Do not attach any stickers or
accessories on the HUD or
crash pad.
• Do not adjust HUD shutter and
combiner directly by hands.
• The image may be invisible due
to finger prints. Also, excessive
force applied during operation
may damage the display.
• Do not place any objects near
the HUD. Interference with
such objects during activation
may influence the operation or
damage the display.
• Do not put any drinks near the
HUD. If liquid flows in the HUD,
the display may be damaged.
• Do not place any objects on the
HUD. Also, attaching some-
thing (sticker, etc.) on the com-
biner may distract the visibility
of the image.
WARNING
3-81
Convenient features of your vehicle
Head Up Display ON/OFF
With the engine ON, you can turn
ON/OFF the HUD by pressing the
HUD button on the crash pad.
With the engine OFF, the HUD will
close automatically when the door is
locked by a remote or smart key.
If your vehicle uses a smart key, the
HUD will close automatically when
the door is locked by pressing the
button on the outside door handle.
If the engine is OFF and the door is
not locked, the HUD will close auto-
matically after approximately 5 min-
utes.
3
• When you open or close the
HUD, noise may occur from
the motor and gear.
• When you adjust the image
height of the HUD, noise may
occur from the motor and
gear.
* HUD stands for Head Up
Display.
CAUTION
OOS047080
• Do not let strong ray shine on
the combiner. It may damage
the combiner and internal com-
ponents.
• Do not place any objects on,
inside or near the display
whether the HUD is opened or
closed. Also, do not attach any
objects on the system compo-
nent or insert anything inside
the system.
• Use soft cloth to clean the
HUD. Do not use organic sol-
vent, detergent or polishing
cloth.
• For your safety, make sure to
stop the vehicle before adjust-
ing the settings.
3-82
Head Up Display Information
1. Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation
information
2. Road signs
3. Speedometer
4. Cruise setting speed
5. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system
information (if equipped)
6. Blind-spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system information
(if equipped)
7. Warning lights
8. Audio/Video information
Information
If you select the Turn By Turn (TBT)
navigation information as HUD con-
tents, the Turn By Turn (TBT) naviga-
tion information will not be displayed
on the LCD Display.
Head Up Display Setting
On the LCD display, you can change
the head up display settings as fol-
lows.
• Display Height
• Rotation
• Brightness
• Content Select
• Speedometer Size
• Speedometer Color
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
OOS047082L
3-83
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Exterior lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) O position
(2) AUTO light position (if equipped)
(3) Position lamp position
(4) Headlamp position
AUTO light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
position, the position lamp and head-
lamp will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleanser
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor oper-
ation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.
NOTICE
LLIIGGHHTTIINNGG
OOS047050L
OPDE046065
3-84
Convenient features of your vehicle
Position lamp position ( )
The position lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.
Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, position lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel lamp
are turned ON.
Information
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.
i
OAE046469L OAE046467L
OAE046453L
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver's vision.
WARNING
3-85
Convenient features of your vehicle
To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.
High Beam Assist (HBA) system
(if equipped)
High Beam Assist (HBA) is a system
that automatically adjusts the head-
lamp range (switches between high
beam and low beam) according to
the brightness of other vehicles and
road conditions.
Operating condition
1.Place the light switch in the AUTO
position.
2.Turn on the high beam by pushing
the lever away from you.
3. The High Beam Assist (HBA) ( )
indicator will illuminate.
4.The High Beam Assist (HBA) will
turn on when vehicle speed is
above 45km/h (25mph).
1) If the light switch is pushed away
when the High Beam Assist
(HBA) is operating, the High
Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off
and the high beam will be on
continuously.
2) If the light switch is pulled
towards you when the high
beam is off, the high beam will
turn on without the High Beam
Assist (HBA) canceled. When
you let go of the light switch, the
lever will move to the middle and
the high beam will turn off.
3) If the light switch is pulled
towards you when the high
beam is on by the High Beam
Assist (HBA), the low beam will
be on and the High Beam Assist
(HBA) will turn off.
4) If the light switch is placed to the
headlamp position, the High
Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off
and the low beam will be on
continuously.
3
OAE046455L
OPDE046057
3-86
When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is
operating, the high beam switches to
low beam in the below conditions.
- When the headlamp of an on-com-
ing vehicle is detected.
- When the tail lamp of a vehicle in
front is detected.
- When headlamp/tail lamp of bicy-
cle/motorcycle is detected.
- When the surrounding is bright
enough high beams are not needed.
- When streetlights or other lights
are detected.
- When the light switch is not in the
AUTO position.
- When the High Beam Assist (HBA)
is off.
- When vehicle speed is below 35 km/h
(22mph).
Warning light and message
When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is
not working properly, the warning
message will come on for a few sec-
ond. After the message disappears,
the master warning light ( ) will illu-
minate.
We recommend that you take your
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
Convenient features of your vehicle
OOS047127L
The system may not operate
normally in the below condi-
tions.
When the light from on-com-
ing or front vehicle is dim
• When the in light from the on-
coming or front vehicle is not
detected because of lamp
damage, hidden from sight,
etc.
• When the lamp of the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is covered
with dust, snow or water.
• When the front vehicle’s head-
lamps are off but the fog
lamps on and etc.
CAUTION
3-87
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
When it is affected by an
external condition
• When there is a similar
shaped lamp with the front
vehicle’s lamps.
• When the headlamp is not
repaired or replaced at an
authorized dealer.
• When headlamp aiming is not
properly adjusted.
• When driving on a narrow
winding road or rough road.
• When driving downhill or
uphill.
• When only part of the vehicle
in front is visible on a cross-
road or on a corner.
• When there is a traffic light,
reflecting sign, flashing sign
or mirror.
• When the road conditions are
bad such as being wet or cov-
ered with snow.
• When the front vehicle’s head-
lamps are off but the fog
lamps on.
• When a vehicle suddenly
appears from an around a cor-
ner.
• When the vehicle is tilted from
a flat tire or being towed.
•
When the Lane Keeping Assist
(LKA) system warning light illu-
minates. (if equipped)
When the front visibility is poor
•
When the lamp of the on-coming
or front vehicle is covered with
dust, snow or water.
•
When the light from the on-com-
ing or front vehicle is not detect-
ed because of exhaust fume,
smoke, fog, snow, etc.
•
When the front window is cov-
ered with foreign matters.
•
When it is hard to see because of
fog, heavy rain or snow and etc.
• Do not disassemble a front
view camera temporarily for
tinted window or attaching any
types of coatings and acces-
sories. If you disassemble the
camera and assemble it again,
we recommend that you take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked to need a cali-
bration.
• When you replace or reinstall
the windshield glass, front
view camera, we recommend
that you take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the system checked.
• Be careful that water doesn’t
get into the High Beam Assist
(HBA) unit and do not remove
or damage related parts of the
High Beam Assist (HBA) sys-
tem.
WARNING
3-88
Convenient features of your vehicle
Turn signals and lane change
signals
To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A). To signal a lane
change, move the turn signal lever
slightly and hold it in position (B).The
lever will return to the OFF position
when released or when the turn is
completed.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch turn signal function
To activate a one-touch turn signal
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times.
You can activate/deactivate the One
Touch Turn Signal function or choose
the number of blinks (3, 5, or 7) from
the User Settings mode on the LCD
display. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
Front fog lamp (if equipped)
Fog lamps are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
OPDE046066
OTLE045284
• Do not place objects on the
crash pad that reflect light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc. The system may malfunc-
tion if sunlight is reflected.
• At times, the High Beam Assist
(HBA) may not work properly.
The system is for your conven-
ience only. It is the responsibil-
ity of the driver for safe driving
practices and always check the
road conditions for your safety.
• When the system does not
operate normally, change the
lamp position manually
between the high beam and
low beam.
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Use the switch next to the headlamp
switch to turn the fog lamps ON and
OFF.
1. Turn on the position lamp.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog lamp position.
3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn
the light switch to the front fog
lamp position again or turn off the
position lamp.
When in operation, the fog lamps
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lamps when visibility is poor.
Rear fog lamp
Vehicle with front fog lamp
To turn on the rear fog lamp:
Position the light switch in the posi-
tion lamp position, turn the light
switch (1) to the front fog lamp posi-
tion, and then turn the light switch (1)
to the rear fog lamp position.
To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one
of the following:
• Turn off the position light switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog
lamp position again.
• When the light switch is in the posi-
tion lamp position, if you turn off
the front fog lamp, the rear fog
lamp will also turn off.
Vehicle without front fog lamp
To turn on the rear fog lamp:
Position the light switch in the head-
lamp position, and then turn the light
switch (1) to the rear fog lamp position.
To turn the rear fog lamps off, do one
of the following:
• Turn off the headlamp switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog
lamp position again.
NOTICE
OTLE045285
OPDE046064
3-90
Convenient features of your vehicle
Battery saver function
The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the position lamp when the
driver turns the engine off and opens
the driver-side door.
With this feature, the position lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the position lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
If you place the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lamps ON, the headlamps (and/or
position lamps) remain on for about 5
minutes. However, with the engine off if
the driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlamps (and/or position lamps)
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlamps (and/or position
lamps) can be turned off by pressing
the lock button on the remote key or
smart key twice or turning the light
switch to the OFF or AUTO position.
However, if you turn the light switch
to the AUTO position when it is dark
outside, the headlamps will not be
turned off.
You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings mode on the LCD dis-
play. For more details, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except dri-
ver's door), the battery saver func-
tion does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically. Therefore, It
causes the battery to be dis-
charged. In this case, make sure to
turn off the lamp before getting out
of the vehicle.
NOTICE
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Daytime running light (DRL)
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL system will turn the dedi-
cated lamp OFF when:
1. The headlamps or front fog lights
are in the ON position.
2. The position light switch is in the
ON position.
3. The engine is turned off.
Headlamp leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlamp beam level
according to the number of the pas-
sengers and loading weight in the
luggage area, turn the beam leveling
switch.
The higher the number on the switch
position, the lower the headlamp
beam level. Always keep the head-
light beam at the proper leveling
position, or headlamps may dazzle
other road users.
Listed below are examples of appro-
priate switch settings for varying
loads. For loading conditions other
than those listed, adjust the switch
position to the most similar situation.
OOS047049
Loading condition
Switch
position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers (including driver) 1
Full passengers (including driver)
+ Maximum permissible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permissible
loading
3
3-92
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the head-
lamp beam level according to the
number of passengers and loading
weight in the luggage area.
It also adjusts to the appropriate head-
lamp beam level for various situations.
Low Beam Assist-Static light
(if equipped)
While driving a corner, for greater
visibility and safety, either the left or
right side Low Beam Assist-Static
light will turn on automatically. The
Low Beam Assist-Static light will turn
on when one of the following condi-
tions occur.
• Vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h
(6 mph) and steering wheel angle
is turned approximately 80 degrees
with the low beam on.
• Vehicle speed is between 10 km/h
(6 mph) to 90 km/h (56 mph) and
steering wheel angle is turned
approximately 35 degrees with the
low beam on.
• When the vehicle is in reverse with
one of the conditions above satis-
fied, the light opposite to the direc-
tion the steering wheel is steered
will turn on.
Welcome system (if equipped)
Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
tailgate) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed with the
smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the function does not work
properly, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. Do
not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
WARNING
3-93
Convenient features of your vehicle
Interior lights
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off otherwise the battery
will discharge.
Interior lamp AUTO cut
The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors are closed. If a door is opened,
the lamp will go off 40 minutes after
the engine is turned off. If the doors
are locked and the vehicle enters the
armed stage of the theft alarm sys-
tem, the lamps will go off five sec-
onds later.
Front lamps
Front map lamp (1)
Press the map lamp lens (1) to turn
ON the map lamp. Re-press the map
lamp lens to turn OFF the map lamp.
Front door lamp ( ) (2) :
The room lamp for the front/rear
seats is automatically turned ON for
approximately 30 seconds, when a
door is opened.
The room lamp for the front/rear
seats is automatically turned ON for
approximately 15 seconds, when the
remote key (smart key) unlocks the
doors. The room lamp fades out,
when the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position in 15 seconds. The
room lamp remains ON up to 20 min-
utes, when a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the either the ACC
or OFF position.
Front room lamp
•
(3) :
Press the button to turn ON the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
•
(4) :
Press the button to turn OFF the
room lamp for the front/rear seats.
NOTICE
3
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.The inte-
rior lights may obscure your view
and cause an accident.
WARNING
OOS047051
OOS047052
■ Type A (Without sunglass case)
■ Type B (With sunglass case)
3-94
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear lamps
Rear room lamp switch :
Press this button to turn the room
lamp on and off.
Do not leave the lamp switches on
for an extended period of time
when the engine is turned off.
Luggage compartment lamp
The luggage compartment lamp
comes on when the tailgate is opened.
The luggage compartment lamp
comes on as long as the tailgate is
open. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, close the
tailgate securely after using the
tailgate.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor
is closed without the lamp off, it
may discharge the battery or dam-
age the sunvisor.
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
OOS047321
OOS047053
■ Type A
■ Type B
OOS047055
OOS047054
3-95
Convenient features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· / MIST – Single wipe
· O / OFF – Off
· --- / INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· 1 / LO– Low wiper speed
· 2 / HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
D : Rear wiper control*
· 2 / HI – High wiper speed
· 1 / LO – Low wiper speed
· O / OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS
3
■ Front windshield wiper/washer ■ Rear windshield wiper/washer
OTLE045159/OTLE045161/OTLE045507/OTLE045508
• Type A
• Type B
• Type A
• Type B
3-96
Convenient features of your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
/MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever down ( )
or up (MIST) and release
it. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
O/OFF : Wiper is not in operation
---/INT : Wiper operates intermittently
at the same wiping intervals.
Use this mode in light rain or
mist. To vary the speed set-
ting, turn the speed control
knob.
1/LO : Normal wiper speed
2/HI : Fast wiper speed
Information
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or until
the snow and/or ice is removed before
using the windshield wipers to ensure
proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or ice
before using the wiper and washer, it may
damage the wiper and washer system.
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the wiper will oper-
ate once to perform a self-check of
the system. Set the wiper to OFF
position when the wiper is not in use.
• When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the O (OFF) position
to stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
• Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
OOS047322L
Sensor
To avoid personal injury from the
windshield wipers, when the
engine is running and the wind-
shield wiper switch is placed in
the AUTO mode:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing the
rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
WARNING
3-97
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, you may
need to add washer fluid to the wash-
er fluid reservoir.
If equipped with the Headlamp
Washer, washer fluid will be sprayed
on the headlamp at the same time you
operate the windshield washer when:
1. The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
2. The light switch is in the headlamp
position.
When the outside temperature is
below freezing, ALWAYS warm the
windshield using the defroster to
prevent the washer fluid from
freezing on the windshield and
obscuring your vision which
could result in an accident and
serious injury or death.
WARNING
• To prevent possible damage
to the washer pump, do not
operate the washer when the
fluid reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers and washer sys-
tem, use anti-freezing washer
fluids in the winter season or
cold weather.
CAUTION
OTLE045163
OTLE045164
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-98
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and wash-
er switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever.
Turn the switch to the desired posi-
tion to operate the rear wiper and
washer.
2 / HI – High wiper speed
1 / LO – Low wiper speed
O / OFF – Off
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue until
you release the lever. (if equipped)
Auto rear wiper (if equipped)
The rear wiper will operate while the
vehicle is in reverse with the front
wiper ON by selecting the function on
the LCD display.
Go to ‘User Settings
→
Convenience
→
Auto Rear Wiper (reverse)’.
OTLE045167
OTLE045165
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTLE045168
OTLE045166
■ Type A
■ Type B
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM
Rear view monitor (if equipped)
The Rear view monitor will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) posi-
tion.
This is a supplemental system that
shows behind the vehicle through
the mirror or navigation display while
backing-up.
• Do not spray the camera or its
surrounding area directly with a
high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure
water may cause the device to
not operate normally.
• Do not use any cleanser con-
taining acid or alkaline deter-
gents when cleaning the lens.
Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water.
Information
Always keep the camera lens clean. The
camera may not work normally if the
lens is covered with dirt, water or snow.
i
NOTICE
The Rear view monitor is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the rear
camera display when backing-
up.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
WARNING
OOS047046
OOS047091
3-100
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system (if equipped)
[A] : Sensor
The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system assists the driver
during reverse movement of the vehi-
cle by chiming if any object is sensed
within the distance of 120 cm (50
inches) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Parking
Distance Warning (Reverse)
system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
in the ON position. However, if vehi-
cle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph),
the system may not detect objects.
• If vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6
mph), the system will not warn you
even though objects are detected.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
OOS047042
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Types of warning sound and indicator
To turn off the Parking Distance
Warning (Reverse) system
(if equipped)
Push the button to turn off the
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse)
system. The indicator light on the
button will turn on.
Types of warning sound Indicator
When an object is 120 cm to 60 cm (47 in. to 24 in.) from the rear
bumper : Buzzer beeps intermittently.
When an object is 60 cm to 30 cm (24 in. to 12 in.) from the rear
bumper : Buzzer beeps more frequently.
When an object is within 30 cm (12 in.) of the rear bumper :
Buzzer beeps continuously.
• The indicator may differ from the illustration depending on objects or
sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that you have
your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction with Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system. If this
occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
OOS047045L
3-102
Convenient features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system
The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system may not operate
normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• Sensor is covered with foreign mat-
ter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of the Parking
Distance Warning (Reverse) system
malfunction when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or acces-
sories have been installed, or if the
vehicle bumper height or sensor
installation has been modified.
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is extreme-
ly hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m (40 inches) and narrower than
14 cm (6 inches) in diameter.
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system precautions
• The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system may not sound
consistently depending on the speed
and shapes of the objects detected.
• The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system may malfunction if
the vehicle bumper height or sensor
installation has been modified or
damaged. Any non-factory installed
equipment or accessories may also
interfere with the sensor perform-
ance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (11 in.) from
the sensor, or it may sense an incor-
rect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains
are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Shock applied
from high pressure water may cause
the device to not operate normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse) system. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
WARNING
3-104
Convenient features of your vehicle
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system
(if equipped)
[A] : Rear Sensor, [B] : Front Sensor
The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 100 cm
(39 inches) in front and 120 cm (47
inches) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.
Operation of the Parking
Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/
Forward) system button is pressed
with the engine running.
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-
cle to make sure there are no
objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direc-
tion to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestri-
ans, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor.
WARNING
OOS047045
OOS047043
OOS047042
■ Front sensor
■ Rear sensor
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system button
turns on automatically and activates
the Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system when
you move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position. However, if vehi-
cle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6
mph), the system will not warn you
even though objects are detected,
and if vehicle speed exceeds 20
km/h (12 mph), the system will turn
off automatically. To turn on the sys-
tem, press the Parking Distance
Warning (Reverse/Forward) system
button.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
• The indicator may differ from the illustration depending on objects or
sensors status. If the indicator blinks, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction with the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward)
system. If this occurs, we recommend that you have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
61 ~ 100
(24 ~39)
Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
61 ~ 120
(24 ~47)
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
31 ~ 60
(12 ~24)
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30
(12)
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Types of warning sound and indicator
cm (in)
3-106
Convenient features of your vehicle
Non-operational conditions of
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system may not
operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• Sensor is covered with foreign mat-
ter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked.
There is a possibility of Parking
Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward)
system malfunction when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed, or
if the vehicle bumper height or sen-
sor installation has been modified.
Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
1 m and narrower than 14 cm in
diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system
precautions
• The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system may not
sound consistently depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been mod-
ified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (11 in.) from
the sensor, or it may sense an incor-
rect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains
are removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-
rounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Shock applied
from high pressure water may cause
the device to not operate normally.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a
Parking Distance Warning
(Reverse/Forward) system.
Always drive safely and cau-
tiously.
WARNING
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
DDEEFFRROOSSTTEERR
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface
of the rear window, never use
sharp instruments or window
cleaners containing abrasives to
clean the window.
Information
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this
chapter.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while the engine is running.
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the cen-
ter facia switch panel. The indicator
on the rear window defroster but-
ton illuminates when the defroster
is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button
again.
Information
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automat-
ically turns off after approximately
20 minutes or when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with out-
side mirror defrosters, they will oper-
ate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
i
NOTICE
i
OOS047302L
OOS047303L
■ Manual climate control system
■ Automatic climate control system
3-108
Convenient features of your vehicle
M
MAANNUUAALL CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS047300L
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection knob
4. Front windshield defroster position
5. A/C (Air conditioning) button*
6. Rear window defroster button
7. Air intake control button
* : if equipped
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling, select:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Mode selection
OOS047304
The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the
ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield.
3-110
Convenient features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
A/C MAX-Level (B, D)
(if equipped)
To operate the A/C MAX, turn the
temperature control knob to extreme
left. Air flow is directed toward the
upper body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
After the interior has cooled suffi-
ciently, whenever possible, move the
temperature knob away from A/C
MAX and press the A/C button.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OOS047305
OOS047306
3-111
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Temperature control (2)
The temperature will increase by turn-
ing the knob to the right. The tempera-
ture will decrease by turning the knob
to the left.
Air intake control (7)
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn
through the heating sys-
tem and heated or cooled
according to the function
selected.
Outside (fresh) air posi-
tion
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Using the system in the fresh air posi-
tion is recommended.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) can cause
fogging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Fan speed control (1)
Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
knob to the left to decrease fan
speed and airflow.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
Operating the fan speed when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion could cause the battery to
discharge. Operate the fan speed
when the engine is running.
NOTICE
i
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING
3-112
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (A/C) (5)
(if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to the
desired temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Information
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regulation
in your country at the time of produc-
tion. You can find out which air condi-
tioning refrigerant is applied to your
vehicle on the label located inside of
the hood. Refer to chapter 8 for the
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
i
3-113
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or sal-
vaged vehicle and new replace-
ment MAC evaporators shall be
certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the fan but turn
the air conditioning system off if
the temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive
water droplets may cause dam-
age to electrical equipment, air
conditioning should only be
used with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the win-
dows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system perform-
ance.
• If you operate the air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection button to the
position and set the fan speed con-
trol knob to the lowest speed set-
ting.
NOTICE
NOTICE
3-114
Convenient features of your vehicle
System maintenance
Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the
glove box. It filters the dust or other
pollutants that enter the vehicle
through the heating and air condi-
tioning system.
We recommend that the climate con-
trol air filter be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule. If
the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent climate control
filter inspections and changes are
required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, we recommend the system be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and com-
pressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
reduces the performance of the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air condi-
tioning system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is impor-
tant that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the vehicle and per-
sonal inju
ry.
WARNING
3-115
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
We recommend the air conditioning
system be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below:
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on
the label located inside of the hood.
Refer to chapter 8 for the location of
the air conditioning refrigerant label.
Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflamma-
ble at very high pres-
sure, the air condition-
ing system should only
be serviced by trained
and certified techni-
cians. It is important
that the correct type and amount
of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause dam-
age to the vehicle and personal
injury.
WARNING
ODH044365R
ODH043366
■ Example
• Type B
• Type A
3-116
Convenient features of your vehicle
A
AUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS047301L
1. Temperature control knob
2. Fan speed control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. Air conditioning button
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Mode selection button
8. Rear window defroster button
9. Air intake control button
10. Climate control information screen
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
The Automatic Climate Control
System is controlled by setting the
desired temperature.
1. Press the AUTO button. (3)
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by the temperature set-
ting you select.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
(1) to the desired temperature. If
the temperature is set to the low-
est setting (Lo), the air condition-
ing system will operate continu-
ously. After the interior has cooled
sufficiently, adjust the knob to a
higher temperature set point
whenever possible.
To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time to
deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign
will illuminate on the information
display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 23°C (73°F).
Information
Never place anything near the sensor
to ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this
case, the system works sequentially
according to the order of buttons select-
ed. When pressing any button except
the AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1.Start the engine.
2.Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling, select:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
7.Press the AUTO button to convert
to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
i
OOS047308
3-118
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor.
Defrost-Level (A) (6)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OOS047304
The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the
ventilation system.
3-119
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control (1)
The temperature will increase by
turning the knob to the right. The
temperature will decrease by turning
the knob to the left.
Air intake control (9)
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger com-
partment will be drawn
through the heating sys-
tem and heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Information
Using the system in the fresh air posi-
tion is recommended.
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) can cause
fogging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment will become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
i
OOS047306
3-120
Convenient features of your vehicle
Fan speed control (2)
The fan speed can be set as desired
by pushing the fan speed control but-
ton.
More air is delivered with higher fan
speeds.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Operating the fan when the ignition
switch is in the ON position could
cause the battery to discharge.
Operate the fan when the engine is
running.
Air conditioning (4)
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode (5)
Push the OFF button to turn the cli-
mate control system off. However,
you can still operate the mode and air
intake buttons as long as the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
NOTICE
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control sys-
tem operation in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
WARNING
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to
the desired position, turn on the air
conditioning system, and adjust the
temperature control to the desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf
refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Information
Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or
R-1234yf according to the regulation
in your country at the time of produc-
tion. You can find out which air condi-
tioning refrigerant is applied to your
vehicle on the label located inside of
the hood. Refer to chapter 8 for the
location of the air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should
be serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement
MAC evaporators shall be certi-
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE
Standard J2842.
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the fan but turn
the air conditioning system off if
the temperature gauge indicates
engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive
water droplets may cause dam-
age to electrical equipment, air
conditioning should only be
used with the windows closed.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
3-122
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air con-
ditioning system with the windows
and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system perform-
ance.
• If you operate the air conditioner
excessively, the difference between
the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of vis-
ibility. In this case, set the mode
selection button to the position
and set the fan speed control knob
to the lowest speed setting.
System maintenance
Climate control air filter
This filter is installed behind the
glove box. It filters the dust or other
pollutants that enter the vehicle
through the heating and air condi-
tioning system.
We recommend that the climate con-
trol air filter be replaced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to the
maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is
being driven in severe conditions such
as dusty or rough roads, more fre-
quent climate control filter inspections
and changes are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-
es, we recommend the system be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and com-
pressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
reduces the performance of the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used. Otherwise, it may
cause damage to the vehicle and
personal injury.
WARNING
3-123
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
We recommend the air conditioning
system be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below:
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on
the label located inside of the hood.
Refer to chapter 8 for the location of
the air conditioning refrigerant label.
Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf
Because the refriger-
ant is mildly inflamma-
ble at very high pres-
sure, the air condition-
ing system should
only be serviced by
trained and certified
technicians. It is
important that the cor-
rect type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the vehi-
cle and personal injury.
WARNING
ODH044365R
ODH043366
■ Example
• Type B
• Type A
3-124
WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG
Convenient features of your vehicle
• For maximum windshield defrost-
ing, set the temperature control
knob to the highest temperature
setting and the fan control knob to
the highest fan speed. Select the
front defrost button on the climate
control display. After the engine
warm-up period, warm air will be
directed to the front windshield.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up inside of the wind-
shield.
Information
If the engine temperature is still cold
after starting, then a brief engine warm
up period may be required for the
vented air flow to become warm or hot.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be select-
ed automatically. Additionally, the air
conditioning (if equipped) will auto-
matically operate if the mode is
selected to the position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
i
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
lower speed.
WARNING
OOS047309
3-125
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning (if equipped) will be
selected automatically.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select the desired fan speed.
2. Select the desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed will
be selected automatically.
If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air
position and higher fan speed are not
selected automatically, adjust the corre-
sponding button or knob manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is controlled to higher fan
speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The air-conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is controlled to higher fan
speed.
OOS047310
OOS047311
OOS047312
3-126
Auto defogging system
(only for automatic climate
control system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the wind-
shield by automatically sensing the
moisture on inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
Information
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside
temperature is below -10 °C.
To cancel or set the Auto Defogging
System, keep the front defroster but-
ton pressed for 3 seconds. The “ADS
OFF” symbol will be shown in the cli-
mate display to inform you that the
system is deactivated. To re-activate
the auto defogging system, follow the
procedure mentioned above and the
“ADS OFF” symbol will disappear.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
Information
For efficiency, do not select recirculat-
ed air position while the Auto defog-
ging system is operating.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
i
i
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cluster ionizer (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position.
Automatic ventilation
(if equipped)
To increase cabin air quality and
reduce windscreen misting, air recir-
culation mode switches off automati-
cally after about 5 to 30 minutes,
depending on outside temperature,
and the air intake will change to out-
side (fresh) mode.
To cancel or set the automatic venti-
lation feature, select Face level mode
and press the air recirculation
mode button for 3 seconds.
When the automatic ventilation is
set, the air recirculation indicator will
blink 6 times. When canceled, the
indicator will blink 3 times.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof opened,
the outside (fresh) air position will be
automatically selected. At this time, if
you press the recirculated air position
button, the recirculated air position
will be selected but will change back
to the outside (fresh) air position after
3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the orig-
inal position that was selected.
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS
3
3-128
Convenient features of your vehicle
S
STTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
Center console storage
To open :
Pull the lever (1).
Glove box
To open the glove box, pull the handle
(1) and the glove box will automatical-
ly open. Close the glove box after use.
NOTICE
Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
ALWAYS keep the storage com-
partment covers closed secure-
ly while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, the items may fly out
of the compartment and may
cause an injury if they strike the
driver or a passenger.
WARNING
OOS047056
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the pas-
senger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.
WARNING
OOS047057
3-129
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.
To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.
Multi box (if equipped)
Small things may be placed on the
multi box.
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not attempt to force sun-
glasses into the sunglass
holder. If the sunglasses
become jammed and you try
to open it forcibly, personal
injury may occur.
WARNING
OOS047059
OOS047058
3-130
Convenient features of your vehicle
Luggage tray (if equipped)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-
tor triangle (front tray), tools, etc. in
the box for easy access.
• Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
To increase luggage space
1. Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and pull out the luggage tray
board backward.
2. Pull out the luggage tray board
completely and remove the lug-
gage tray.(If the luggage tray is
equipped.)
3. Push the luggage tray board into
the lower sliding slot frontward.
OOS047070
OOS047320
OOS047319
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Cup holder
Front
Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.
Rear (if equipped)
Pull the armrest down to use the cup
holders.
• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle's electrical/elec-
tronic system and damage elec-
trical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.
NOTICE
OOS047060
OOS047061
• Avoid abrupt starting and
braking when the cup holder
is in use to prevent spilling
your drink. If hot liquid spills,
you could be burned. Such a
burn to the driver could cause
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
vehicle is in motion. Injuries
may result in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Only use soft cups in the cup
holders. Hard objects can
injure you in an accident.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a hot vehicle. It may
explode.
WARNING
3-132
Convenient features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Use the ticket holder (4) to hold tick-
ets.
Information
Close the vanity mirror cover securely
and return the sunvisor to its original
position after use.
Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the ticket
holder.
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems.
The devices should draw less than
180 W(Watt) with the engine running.
To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the battery
to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 180 W(Watt) in
electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
For your safety, do not block your
view when using the sunvisor.
WARNING
OOS047062
OOS047063
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.
WARNING
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet.These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other elec-
tronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electrical/
electronic devices with reverse
current protection. The current
from the battery may flow into the
vehicle's electrical/electronic sys-
tem and cause system malfunc-
tion.
Wireless cellular phone charg-
ing system (if equipped)
There is a wireless cellular phone
charger inside the front console.
The system is available when all
doors are closed, and when the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC/ON position.
To charge a cellular phone
The wireless cellular phone charging
system charges only the Qi-enabled
cellular phones ( ). Read the label
on the cellular phone accessory
cover or visit your cellular phone
manufacturer’s website to check
whether your cellular phone supports
the Qi technology.
The wireless charging process starts
when you put a Qi-enabled cellular
phone on the wireless charging unit.
1. Remove other items, including the
smart key, from the wireless charg-
ing unit. If not, the wireless charg-
ing process may be interrupted.
Place the cellular phone on the
center of charging pad.
2. The indicator light is orange when
the cellular phone is charging. The
indicator light turns green when
phone charging is complete.
3. You can turn ON or OFF the wire-
less charging function in the User
Settings mode on the instrument
cluster. For further information, refer
to the “LCD Display Modes” in this
chapter.
If your cellular phone is not charging:
- Slightly change the position of the
cellular phone on the charging pad.
- Make sure the indicator light is
orange.
OOS047064
3-134
Convenient features of your vehicle
The indicator light will blink orange
for 10 seconds if there is a malfunc-
tion in the wireless charging system.
In this case, temporarily stop the
charging process, and re-attempt to
wirelessly charge your cellular phone
again.
The system warns you with a mes-
sage on the LCD display if the cellular
phone is still on the wireless charging
unit after the engine is turned OFF
and the front door is opened.
• The wireless cellular phone
charging system may not sup-
port certain cellular phones,
which are not verified for the Qi
specification ( ).
• Locate your cellular phone well
in the middle of the wireless cel-
lular phone charging system.
Even when your cellular phone
locates slightly to one side, the
charging speed may decrease
and the phone may heat when
charging.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop, when a
smart key function operates (i.e.
starting the engine, opening the
doors, closing the doors).
• For certain cellular phone, the
indicator color may not change to
green, even when the wireless
charging process is properly
completed.
• The wireless charging process may
temporarily stop, when tempera-
ture abnormally increases inside
the wireless cellular phone charg-
ing system. The wireless charging
process restarts, when tempera-
ture falls to a certain level.
• The wireless charging process
may temporarily stop when there
is any metallic item, such as a
coin, between the wireless cellu-
lar phone charging system and a
cellular phone.
• For certain cellular phones with
their own protection, the wireless
charging speed may decrease
and the wireless charging may
stop.
• If the cellular phone has a thick
cover, the wireless charging may
not be possible.
• If the cellular phone is not fully
contacted into the wireless
charging pad, the wireless charg-
ing may not be possible.
• Some magnetic item (credit
cards, phone cards, passbook
and tickets) may be damaged
while wireless charging process.
NOTICE
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Clock
Vehicles with Audio system
Select the [SETUP/CLOCK ] button on
the audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].
• Set time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
Vehicles with Navigation system
Select the Settings menu on the
Navigation system ➟ Select
[Date/Time].
• GPS time: Displays time according
to the received GNSS time.
• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24
hour.
For more details, please refer to
the separate manual that was sup-
plied with your vehicle.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.
Do not hang other objects such
as hangers or hard objects
except clothes. Also, do not put
heavy, sharp or breakable
objects in the clothes pockets.
In an accident or when the cur-
tain air bag is inflated, it may
cause vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.
WARNING
OOS047066
Do not adjust the clock while
driving.You may lose your steer-
ing control and cause severe
personal injury or accidents.
WARNING
OOS047065
3-136
Convenient features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped)
ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.
Luggage net (holder)
To keep items from shifting in the lug-
gage compartment, you can use the
four holders located in the luggage
compartment, to attach the luggage
net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to obtain a luggage
net.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchor(s) before
driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
HYUNDAI recommends that the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
WARNING
OOS047068
OOS047067
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Cargo area cover (if equipped)
Use the cover to hide items stored in
the cargo area.
The cargo area cover will lift when
the tailgate is opened.
Disconnect the strap (1) from the
holder if you want to return the cover
to the original position. To remove the
cargo area cover completely, lift the
cover to a 50-degree angle and pull it
out (2).
Since the cargo area cover may be
damaged or deformed, do not put
luggage on it when it is being used.
NOTICE
• Do not place objects on the
cargo area cover while driv-
ing. Such objects may be
thrown about inside the vehi-
cle and possibly injure vehicle
occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
• Maintain balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as
far forward as possible.
WARNING
OOS047069
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
WARNING
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
CAUTION
3-138
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, be sure not to position
cargo onto the roof rack in such a
way that it could interfere with
sunroof operation.
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
NOTICE
NOTICE
EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS
Convenient features of your vehicle
OOS047317
• The following specification is
the maximum weight that can
be loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly
as possible onto the roof rack
and secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are
loaded onto the roof rack.
Avoid sudden starts, braking,
sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers
or high speeds that may result
in loss of vehicle control or
rollover resulting in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carry-
ing items on the roof rack.
Severe wind updrafts, caused
by passing vehicles or natural
causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This
is especially true when carry-
ing large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
This could cause the items to
fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or
others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driving
to make sure the items on the
roof rack are securely fastened.
WARNING
ROOF 80 kg (176 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Multimedia System
Multimedia system.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering wheel audio controls .......................................4-3
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free ..........4-4
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) ..................4-4
How vehicle radio works.................................................4-4
AUDIO (Without Touch Screen)...........................4-7
Feature of your audio......................................................4-8
Radio...................................................................................4-13
Media..................................................................................4-14
Phone .................................................................................4-23
Setup ..................................................................................4-31
Declaration of conformity ..................................4-33
CE for EU ..........................................................................4-33
4
4-2
Multimedia System
Information
• If you install an aftermarket HID
headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic devices may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration.
AUX, USB and iPod
®
port
You can use an AUX port to connect
audio devices and an USB port to plug
in an USB and an iPod
®
port.
Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Antenna
Roof antenna
The roof antenna receives transmit-
ted data. (For example : AM/FM,
DAB, GPS/GNSS)
Rotate the roof antenna in a counter-
clockwise direction to remove it.
Rotate it in a clockwise direction to
reinstall it.
• Before entering a place with low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna,
it is important that it is fully
tightened and adjusted to the
upright position to ensure prop-
er reception.
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a cleaner
or use a scraper to remove for-
eign deposits as this may cause
damage to the antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can degrade the received AM
and FM broadcast signals.
NOTICE
NOTICE
ii
MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM
OOS047071
OOS047074
4-3
Multimedia System
4
Steering wheel audio controls
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control
switches are installed for your conven-
ience.
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Move the VOLUME toggle switch
up to increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME toggle switch
down to decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch
is moved up or down and held for 0.8
seconds or more, it will function in
the following modes.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select switch. It will SEEK until you
release the switch.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW switch.
If the SEEK/PRESET toggle switch
is moved up or down, it will function
in the following modes.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION UP/DOWN switch.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN switch.
MODE ( ) (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, Disc, or AUX.
MUTE ( ) (4)
• Press the button to mute the
sound.
• Press the button again to activate
the sound.
Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
i
NOTICE
OOS047072
OOS047073
■ Type A
■ Type B
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
(RHD vehicle : Right side)
• Audio : For detailed information,
refer to “AUDIO” in this chapter.
• AVN : Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the man-
ual supplied separately.
Audio / Video / Navigation sys-
tem (AVN) (if equipped)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
How vehicle radio works
FM reception
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then received by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
OJF045308L
4-4
Multimedia System
OOS047075
OOS047076
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM (MW, LW) reception
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature
of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere.
In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide
better signal coverage.
FM radio station
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are eas-
ily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio.
The following conditions are normal
and do not indicate radio trouble :
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
¢¢¢
JBM004
OJF045310L
OJF045309L
4-5
Multimedia System
4
4-6
Multimedia System
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with the
audio equipment. In such a case, use
the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must be
fitted. When a cellular phone or a
radio set is used with an internal
antenna alone, it may interfere
with the vehicle's electrical sys-
tem and adversely affect safe
operation of the vehicle.
iPod
®
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by HYUNDAI is under
license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
NOTICE
OJF045311L
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING
4-7
Multimedia System
4
AAUUDDIIOO ((WWiitthhoouutt TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn))
J9G4H0000EE
(With
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology)
4-8
Multimedia System
Feature of Your Audio
Head unit
❈The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) SEEK/TRACK
• Search for next station in DAB/FM*
and AM radio mode.
• Change the current song in media
mode.
* with DAB (if equipped)
(2) RADIO
• Start DAB/FM* and AM radio.
* with DAB (if equipped)
(3) MEDIA
• Select USB(iPod
®
), Bluetooth
®
(BT)
Audio or AUX.
• Display the media menu when two
or more media are connected or
when the [MEDIA] button is pressed
in media mode.
(4) PHONE
• Start Bluetooth
®
Phone mode.
(5) POWER/VOLUME knob
• Turn to adjust the volume.
• Press to turn the device on or off.
(6) RESET
• Shutdown and restart the system.
4-9
Multimedia System
4
(7) PRESET
• Move to the previous/next preset
page in radio mode.
(8) SETUP/CLOCK
• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System and Display Off
settings.
• Press and hold to set the date/time.
(9) MENU
• Display additional menus available
on the current screen.
(10) BACK
• Return to the previous screen.
(11) TUNE knob
• Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list.
• Press to select an item.
(12) [1] ~ [6] (Preset)
• Save/play presets in radio mode.
• Select/launch the numeric menus
displayed on the screen.
4-10
Multimedia System
Steering wheel remote control
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) MUTE
• Mutes the audio.
• Mutes the microphone during a
call.
(2) MODE
• Press the button to change the
mode in the following order: Radio
➟ Media.
(3) VOLUME
• Press to adjust the volume.
(4) UP/DOWN
• Press the button in radio mode to
search Presets.
• Press and hold the button in radio
mode to search frequencies.
• Press the button in media mode to
change the current song. (except
AUX)
• Press and hold the button in media
mode to quick search through
songs. (except Bluetooth
®
(BT)
Audio and AUX)
(5) CALL
• Pressing the button
- If not in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode or receiving a phone call.
First press: Automatically display
the most recently Dialled Call
number.
Second press: Dial the phone
number entered.
- Press in the Incoming Call notifi-
cation screen to accept the
phone call.
- Press in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode to switch to the waiting
call.
• Pressing and holding the button
(more than 1.0 seconds)
- If not in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode or receiving a phone call,
the most recently Dialled Call
number is dialled.
- Press in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode to transfer the call to your
cell phone.
- Press in cell phone mode to
switch to Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode.
(6) END
• Press in Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
mode to end the phone call.
• Press in the incoming call screen
to reject the call.
4-11
Multimedia System
4
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
• Exercise caution not to spill
water or introduce foreign
objects into the device. Such
acts could lead to smoke, fire,
or product malfunction.
WARNING
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product mal-
function. Continued use in
such conditions could lead to
accidents (fires, electric
shock) or product malfunc-
tions.
• Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to light-
ning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in park-
ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehi-
cle engine turned on.
Prolonged use with the igni-
tion turned on only could
result in battery discharge.
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
WARNING
4-12
Multimedia System
• Operating the device while driv-
ing could lead to accidents due
to a lack of attention to external
surroundings. First park the
vehicle before operating the
device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external
sounds cannot be heard may
lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume set-
ting when turning the device on.
A sudden output of extreme vol-
ume upon turning the device on
could lead to hearing impair-
ment. (Adjust the volume to a
suitable levels before turning off
the device.)
• Turn on the car engine before
using this device. Do not oper-
ate the audio system for long
periods of time only with the
ignition turned on as such oper-
ations may lead to battery dis-
charge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD.
• When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the device and
use a dry and smooth cloth.
Never use tough materials, chem-
ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.). As such
materials may damage the device
panel or cause color/quality dete-
rioration.
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
Information on status icons
Icons showing audio status are shown
in the upper-right corner of the screen.
NOTICE
Icon Description
Mute Mute engaged
Battery
Remaining battery life of
a connected Bluetooth
®
device
Handsfree +
Audio stream-
ing connection
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
call and audio streaming
available
Handsfree
connection
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
call available
Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
Bluetooth
®
audio
streaming available
Downloading
contacts
Downloading contacts
through Bluetooth
®
wire-
less communications
Downloading
call history
Downloading call history
through Bluetooth
®
wire-
less communications
Line busy Phone call in progress
Mute mic
Mic muted during a
call (caller cannot
hear your voice)
Phone signal
strength
Display the phone signal
strength for a cell phone
connected by Bluetooth
®
4-13
Multimedia System
4
Radio
FM/AM (with RDS (if equipped))
Switching between FM and AM
• Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between
FM and AM.
Searching stations
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
search stations.
Presets
Save up to 36 frequently used sta-
tions.
1. Press and hold the desired slot
from 1 through 36. This saves the
current station in the selected slot.
If the slot is empty, simply press-
ing saves the station to the slot.
2. To save in slots numbered 7 or
higher, press the [PRESET] but-
ton to move to the previous/next
page and save.
To listen to a preset station, press
the desired station in the list.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• List: A list of all available stations in
the current location of the vehicle is
displayed. Press the desired sta-
tion.
• Traffic Announcement (TA): Enable
or disable Traffic Announcements.
• Scan: All available stations are
played for five seconds each.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
DAB/FM (with DAB)
Switching between DAB/FM and AM
• Press the [RADIO] button on the
audio system to switch between
DAB/FM and AM.
Searching stations
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
search stations.
4-14
Multimedia System
Presets
Save up to 36 frequently used sta-
tions.
1. Press and hold the desired slot
from 1 through 36. This saves the
current station in the selected slot.
If the slot is empty, simply press-
ing saves the station to the slot.
2. To save in slots numbered 7 or
higher, press the [PRESET] but-
ton to move to the previous/next
page and save.
To listen to a preset station, press
the desired station in the list.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• List: A list of all available stations in
the current location of the vehicle is
displayed. Press the desired sta-
tion.
• Traffic Announcement (TA): Enable
or disable Traffic Announcements.
• Region : Enable or disable auto-
matic switching between regional
stations.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
• Scan: All available stations are
played for five seconds each.
• Manual tune FM : Search for fre-
quencies manually.
Media
Information
- Using MP3
Supported audio formats
File formats other than the for-
mats above may not be recog-
nized or playable. Information
such as filename may not be dis-
played.
NOTICE
i
4-15
Multimedia System
4
Range of supported compressed file
types
1. Bitrate range (Kbps)
2. Sampling frequency (Hz)
• The sound quality of MP3/WMA
compressed and WAV files may
vary depending on the bitrate. (A
higher bitrate can have better
sound quality.)
• The product only recognizes files
with the MP3, WMA or WAV exten-
sion. Files without one of these
extensions are not recognized.
3. Number of recognizable folders
and files
• Folders: 2,000 for USB
• Files: 6,000 for USB
• No recognition limit for folder hier-
archies
4. Character display range (Unicode)
• Filenames: Up to 64 English char-
acters (64 Korean characters)
• Foldernames: Up to 32 English
characters (32 Korean characters)
Languages supported (Unicode sup-
port)
• Korean: 2,604 characters
• English: 94 characters
• Common Chinese characters:
4,888 characters
• Special symbols: 986 characters
Japanese/Simplified Chinese
characters are not supported.
NOTICE
4-16
Multimedia System
Information
- Using the USB Devices
• Starting the vehicle while a USB
device is connected can damage the
device. Please disconnect USB
devices before starting the vehicle.
• Starting the vehicle or stopping the
engine while an external USB device
is connected can result in failure of
the external USB device to operate.
• Be cautious of static electricity when
connecting/disconnecting external
USB devices.
• An encrypted MP3 player is not rec-
ognized when connected as an exter-
nal device.
• External USB devices may not be
recognized, depending on the state
of the external USB device.
• Only products with byte/sectors for-
matted at 4 KB or lower are recog-
nized.
• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32
format are recognized; NTFS and
ExFAT file systems are not recog-
nized.
• Some USB devices are not recog-
nized due to compatibility issues.
• Do not touch the USB connections.
• Connecting and disconnecting USB
devices rapidly over a short period
of time can cause equipment failure.
• Abnormal sounds may be audible
when the USB device is disconnect-
ed.
• Turn the audio off before connecting
or disconnecting external USB
devices.
• Recognition may take longer
depending on the type, capacity or
file format of the external USB
device. This is not a product mal-
function.
• Use of USB devices for purposes
other than playing music files is pro-
hibited.
• Image display and video playback
are not supported.
• Use of USB accessories, including
charge and heat though the USB I/F,
can lead to reduced product per-
formance or malfunctions. Do not
use USB devices or accessories for
these purposes.
• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and
extension cables can result in the
vehicle’s audio system failing to rec-
ognize your USB device. Connect
the USB device directly to the multi-
media port of your vehicle.
• When using high-capacity USB
devices with logical drive divisions,
only files saved on the highest level
logical drive can be played.
If applications are loaded on a USB
drive, file playback may fail.
• Some MP3 players, cell phones, dig-
ital cameras, etc. (USB devices that
are not recognized as mobile stor-
age) may not operate normally
when connected.
• USB charging may not be supported
by some mobile devices.
• Operation is guaranteed only for
standard (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory drives.
i
4-17
Multimedia System
4
• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and
memory stick devices is not guaran-
teed.
• DRM (Digital Rights Management)
files cannot be played.
• SD-type USB memory, CF-type
USB memory, and other USB mem-
ory devices that require adapters
for connection are not supported.
• Proper operation of USB HDDs or
USB drives with connectors that
loosen due to vehicle vibrations is
not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
• USB products that are
used as key chains or
cell phone accessories
may damage the USB
jack and affect proper
file playback. Please refrain from
use. Use only products with plug
connectors, as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
• When MP3 devices or cell phones
are connected simultaneously
through AUX, BT Audio and USB
modes, a popping noise or malfunc-
tion may occur.
USB
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) List
View a list of all songs by pressing
button [3].
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [USB].
• Connect a USB drive to the USB
port to automatically play files on
the USB drive.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous or next song.
Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
Search songs by turning TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
4-18
Multimedia System
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable
‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’,
‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat category’
play.
• Repeat all: Repeat all songs.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Information
The repeat folder function is available
only when songs are playing from the
[File] category under [List].
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle
category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran-
dom order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Information: Detailed information
on the song that is currently play-
ing is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Information
- Using the iPod
®
Devices
• To use the audio system’s iPod
®
con-
trol function, use the dedicated
cable provided with your iPod
®
.
• Connecting the iPod
®
to the vehicle
during play may result in a loud
noise that lasts about one to two sec-
onds. Connect the iPod
®
to the vehi-
cle after stopping or pausing play.
• Connect the iPod
®
with the vehicle
in the ACC ON state to begin charg-
ing.
• When connecting the iPod
®
cable,
be sure to fully push the cable into
the port.
• When EQ effects are enabled simul-
taneously on external devices, such
as iPod
®
s and the audio system, the
EQ effects may overlap, causing
sound quality deterioration or dis-
tortion. Deactivate the EQ function
for all external devices, if possible.
• Noise may occur when your iPod
®
or the AUX port is connected.
Disconnect and store separately
when not in use.
i
i
4-19
Multimedia System
4
• There may be noise if the audio sys-
tem is used with an iPod
®
or AUX
external device connected to the
power jack. In these cases, discon-
nect the iPod
®
or external device
from the power jack.
• Play may be interrupted, or device
malfunctions may occur depending
on the characteristics of your
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
.
• Play may fail if your iPhone
®
is con-
nected through both Bluetooth
®
and
USB. In this case, select Dock con-
nector or Bluetooth
®
on your
iPhone
®
to change the sound output
settings.
• If your software version does not
support the communication proto-
col or your iPod
®
is not recognized
due to device failure, anomalies or
defects, iPod
®
mode cannot be used.
• iPod
®
nano (5th generation) devices
may not be recognized if the battery
is low. Charge sufficiently before
use.
• The search and song play order in
the iPod
®
device may be different
from the search order in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
has failed due to an
internal defect, please reset the
iPod
®
(consult your iPod
®
manual).
• Depending on the software version,
the iPod
®
may fail to sync with the
system. If the media is removed or
disconnected before recognition, the
previous mode may not be restored
(iPad
®
cannot be charged).
• Cables other than the 1-meter cable
provided with iPod
®
/iPhone
®
prod-
ucts may not be recognized.
• When other music apps are used on
your iPod
®
, the system sync func-
tion may fail due to malfunction of
the iPod
®
application.
iPod
®
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) List
View a list of all songs by pressing
button [3].
4-20
Multimedia System
Playback
Connect your iPod
®
to the audio
USB port, press the [MEDIA] button,
and select [iPod].
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous or next song.
Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]
button to rewind or fast forward the
currently playing song.
Search songs by turning the TUNE
knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs
available for play.
Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable
‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat current
song’ play.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable
‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
When other music programs are
running
When songs saved on your iPod
®
are playing through a separate music
app, the above screen is displayed.
(1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music
by pressing button [1].
(2) iPod files: Play music files saved
on your iPod
®
by pressing button
[2].
(3) Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed by pressing
button [3].
4-21
Multimedia System
4
Playing iPod files
Select [iPod files] to play songs
saved on your iPod
®
.
If there are no songs saved on your
iPod
®
, the [iPod files] is disabled.
Information
Operation cannot be carried out cor-
rectly due to iPod
®
application mal-
function.
Information
- Using Bluetooth
®
(BT) Audio
• Bluetooth
®
Audio mode can only be
used if a Bluetooth
®
-enabled phone
is connected. Only devices that sup-
port Bluetooth
®
audio can be used.
• If the Bluetooth
®
-enabled phone is
disconnected during play, the music
stops.
• When the TRACK UP/DOWN but-
tons are used during Bluetooth
®
audio streaming, a popping noise or
sound interruptions may occur,
depending on the cell phone device.
• Depending on the cell phone model,
the audio streaming function may
not be supported.
• If a phone call is made or received
when music is playing in Bluetooth
®
Audio mode, the call may mix with
the music.
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Audio mode after ending a call, play
might not resume automatically for
some cell phone models.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a fea-
ture that enables drivers to prac-
tice safe driving. Connecting the
car audio system with a
Bluetooth
®
phone allows the
user to conveniently make calls,
receive calls, and manage the
phone book. Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology,
carefully read the contents of
this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be
the cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for pro-
longed periods of time is dan-
gerous and may lead to acci-
dents.
• When driving, view the screen
only for short periods of time.
NOTICE
i
i
4-22
Multimedia System
Bluetooth
®
(BT) Audio
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat by pressing
button [1].
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play by press-
ing button [2].
(3) Play/Pause
Pause or play music by pressing but-
ton [3].
Information
Some cell phones may not support this
function.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [BT Audio].
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to
play the previous or next song.
Information
Some cell phones may not support this
function.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable
‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or
‘Repeat category’ play.
• Repeat all: Repeat all songs.
• Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
• Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
Information
The repeat play function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the con-
nected Bluetooth
®
device.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable or disable
‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.
• Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order.
• Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in
random order.
Information
The shuffle function is engaged,
depending on the operation of the con-
nected Bluetooth
®
device.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Connections: The currently con-
nected Bluetooth
®
device can be
changed.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
i
i
i
i
4-23
Multimedia System
4
AUX
Running AUX
Press the [MEDIA] button, and
select [AUX].
• Connect the external device con-
nection jack to the AUX terminal to
run AUX.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button and select
the desired function.
• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
Phone
Information
- Using Bluetooth
®
(BT) Phone
• Bluetooth
®
is a near-field wireless
networking technology that uses the
2.4 GHz frequency to connect vari-
ous devices within a certain distance
wirelessly.
• The technology is used in PCs,
peripherals, Bluetooth
®
phones,
tablet PCs, household appliances
and automobiles. Devices support-
ing Bluetooth
®
can exchange data at
high speeds without physical cable
connections.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree devices
enable convenient access to phone
functions through cell phones
equipped with Bluetooth
®
.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not be
supported by the Bluetooth
®
Handsfree function.
• When Bluetooth
®
is connected and
calls are attempted through a con-
nected cell phone from outside the
vehicle, the call is connected
through the Bluetooth
®
Handsfree
function of the vehicle.
• Please be sure to disconnect the
Bluetooth
®
Handsfree function
through your Bluetooth
®
device or
the audio screen.
• The Bluetooth
®
Handsfree function
helps drivers to drive safely. By con-
necting a Bluetooth
®
-enabled phone
to the vehicle’s audio system, phone
calls can be made and received
through the audio system and con-
tacts can be managed. Consult the
user manual before use.
• Excessive manipulation of controls
while driving, making it difficult to
pay attention to the road ahead, can
lead to accidents. Do not operate the
device excessively while driving.
• Looking at the screen for a pro-
longed time increases the risk of
accidents. Keep time spent looking
at the screen to a minimum.
i
4-24
Multimedia System
Precautions when connecting
Bluetooth
®
devices
• The vehicle supports the following
Bluetooth
®
functions. Some
Bluetooth
®
devices may not sup-
port some functions.
1) Bluetooth
®
Handsfree phone
calls
2) Operations during a call
(Private, Switch, Mic Vol. con-
trols)
3) Download call history saved to
the Bluetooth
®
device
4) Download contacts saved to the
Bluetooth
®
device
5) Automatic contacts/call history
download when Bluetooth
®
is
connected
6) Automatic Bluetooth
®
device
connection when the vehicle is
started
7) Bluetooth
®
audio streaming
playback
• Before connecting the audio sys-
tem to your device, make sure your
device supports Bluetooth
®
.
• Even if your device supports
Bluetooth
®
, a Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion cannot be established if the
device’s Bluetooth
®
function is
switched off. Search and connect
with the Bluetooth
®
function
enabled.
• Pair or connect Bluetooth
®
devices
to the audio system with the vehi-
cle at a standstill.
• If a Bluetooth
®
connection is lost
due to abnormal conditions while a
Bluetooth
®
device is connected
(communication range exceeded,
device power OFF, communication
errors, etc.), the disconnected
Bluetooth
®
device is searched for
and automatically reconnected.
• If you want to disable the
Bluetooth
®
device auto-connect
function, turn the Bluetooth
®
func-
tion OFF on your device. Consult
the user manuals for individual
devices to see whether Bluetooth
®
is supported.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
device.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices are sub-
ject to intermittent Bluetooth
®
con-
nection failures. In this case, use
the following method.
1) Turn the Bluetooth
®
function off
on your Bluetooth
®
device ➟
Turn it on and try again.
2) Delete the paired device from
both the audio system and
Bluetooth
®
device, then pair
again.
3) Power down your Bluetooth
®
device ➟ Turn it on and try
again.
4) Completely remove the battery
from your Bluetooth
®
device;
reinsert it, reboot, and attempt
connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reat-
tempt connection.
4-25
Multimedia System
4
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
device
Information on pairing Bluetooth
®
devices
• Pairing refers to the process of
pairing Bluetooth
®
cell phones or
devices with the system prior to
connection. This is a necessary
procedure for Bluetooth
®
connec-
tion and usage.
• Up to five devices can be paired.
• Pairing Bluetooth
®
device is not
allowed while vehicle is moving.
Pairing the first Bluetooth
®
device
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button
on the steering wheel remote control
➟ Search for the vehicle from the
Bluetooth
®
device, and pair ➟ Enter
the passkey on the Bluetooth
®
device or approve passkey ➟
Bluetooth
®
pairing completed.
1. When the [PHONE] button on the
audio or the [CALL] button on the
steering wheel remote control is
pressed, the following screen is
displayed. Devices can now be
paired.
(1) Vehicle name: Searched name in
Bluetooth
®
device.
Information
The vehicle name in the image above
is an example. Refer to your device for
the actual name of your device.
2. Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices in the Bluetooth
®
menu of
your Bluetooth
®
device (cell
phone, etc.).
3. Confirm that the vehicle name in
your Bluetooth
®
device matches
the vehicle name shown on the
audio screen, then select it.
4-1. For devices that require passkey
entry, a passkey entry screen is
shown on your Bluetooth
®
device.
- Enter the passkey ‘0000’, in your
Bluetooth
®
device.
4-2. For devices that require passkey
confirmation, the following
screen is shown on the audio
system. A 6-digit passkey input
screen is shown in the
Bluetooth
®
device.
- After confirming that the 6-digit
passkey on the audio screen
and the Bluetooth
®
device are
identical, select [OK] in your
Bluetooth
®
device.
i
4-26
Multimedia System
Information
The 6-digit passkey in the image
above is an example. Refer to your
vehicle for the actual passkey.
Pairing a second Bluetooth
®
device
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Bluetooth] ➟ Select [Connections]
➟ Select [Add new device].
- The pairing procedure from this
point is identical to [Pairing the first
Bluetooth device].
Information
• Bluetooth
®
standby mode lasts for
three minutes. If a device is not
paired within three minutes, pairing
is canceled. Start over from the
beginning.
• For most Bluetooth
®
devices, a con-
nection is established automatically
after pairing. Some devices, howev-
er, require separate confirmation
when connecting after pairing. Be
sure to check your Bluetooth
®
device after pairing to confirm that
it has connected.
Connecting Bluetooth
®
devices
If there are no connected devices
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio system or the [CALL] button in
the steering wheel remote control ➟
List of paired Bluetooth
®
devices ➟
Select the desired Bluetooth
®
device
from the list ➟ Connect Bluetooth
®
.
ii
4-27
Multimedia System
4
If there are connected devices
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Settings] ➟
Select [Connections] ➟ Select
Bluetooth
®
device to connect ➟ Select
[Connect] ➟ Connect Bluetooth
®
.
Information
• Only one Bluetooth
®
device can be
connected at a time.
• When a Bluetooth
®
device is con-
nected, other devices cannot be
paired.
Accepting/rejecting phone calls
Receiving phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
connected.
(1) Caller name: If the caller number
is in your contacts, the correspon-
ding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(3) Accept: Accept call.
(4) Reject: Reject call.
Information
• When the incoming call screen is
displayed, audio mode and the set-
tings screen cannot be shown. Only
call volume control is supported.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
support the call reject function.
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
support the phone number display
function.
i
i
4-28
Multimedia System
Operation during calls
Incoming call with Bluetooth
®
con-
nected ➟ Select [Accept].
(1) Call duration: Call duration display.
(2) Caller name: If the caller number is
in your contacts, the corresponding
name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming
phone number is displayed.
(4) Private: Call is transferred to a cell
phone.
(5) End: End call.
(6) Mute: Block outgoing voice.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button and select
the desired function.
• Switch: Switch between calls if
connected to two or more calls.
• Microphone Volume: Adjust outgo-
ing voice volume.
Information
• Some Bluetooth
®
devices may not
support the Private function.
• The outgoing voice volume may
vary depending on the type of
Bluetooth
®
device. If the outgoing
voice volume is too high or low,
adjust the Microphone Volume.
• The Switch menu will only be dis-
played if connected to two or more
calls.
Favourites
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Favourites] ➟
Favourites list displayed.
(1) Add to favourites: Add a down-
loaded phone number to
favourites.
(2) Favourites list: A list of paired
favourite is displayed
Connect a call when selected.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Delete: Delete a saved favourites.
i
4-29
Multimedia System
4
Information
• Up to 20 favourites can be saved for
each connected Bluetooth
®
device.
• Favourites can be accessed when the
Bluetooth
®
device they were paired
from is connected.
• The audio system does not down-
load favourites from Bluetooth
®
devices. Favourites must be newly
saved before use.
• To add to favourites, contacts must
be downloaded first.
• Saved favourites are not updated
even if the contacts of the connected
Bluetooth
®
device are changed. In
this case, favourites need to be delet-
ed and added again.
Call history
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Call history]
➟ Call history is displayed.
(1) Call history: Display the down-
loaded call history list.
Connect a call when selected.
(2) Call duration: Display the time the
call was connected.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• All calls: Display all call history.
• Missed calls: Display missed calls.
• Dialled calls: Display dialled calls.
• Received calls: Display received
calls.
• Download: Download call history
from connected Bluetooth
®
devices.
Information
• Up to 50 dialled, received and
missed calls are saved.
• When the latest call history is
received, the existing call history is
deleted.
i
i
4-30
Multimedia System
Contacts
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟
Select letter (ABC) ➟ Contacts dis-
played.
(1) Contacts: Display downloaded
contacts.
If one phone number is saved, the
number will be dialled when
selected.
If two or more phone numbers are
saved, a list of saved numbers will
be displayed when selected.
Menu
Press the [MENU] button, and select
the desired function.
• Download: Download contacts
from connected Bluetooth
®
devices.
Information
• Only supported contacts format can
be downloaded and displayed from
the Bluetooth device, contacts from
some applications will not be included.
• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.
• In some cases, additional confirma-
tion from your Bluetooth
®
device is
necessary when downloading con-
tacts. If downloading of contacts
unsuccessful, consult your Bluetooth
®
device’s settings or the audio screen to
approve the download.
• Contacts without phone numbers
are not displayed.
Settings
Press the [PHONE] button on the
audio ➟ Select [Settings].
- For more details, refer to Setup ➟
Bluetooth page.
i
4-31
Multimedia System
4
Setup
Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System and Display Off
settings.
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system.
Display
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Display].
• Dimming mode: Brightness is auto-
matically adjusted according to the
headlight use.
• Brightness: The brightness of the
audio screen can be changed.
• Screensaver: Set the information
displayed when the audio system
is switched off or the screen is
turned off.
Sound
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Sound].
• Position: Sound balance and fader
can be adjusted.
• Equaliser: Sound tone color can be
adjusted.
• Speed dependent volume control:
Automatically adjust volume based
on vehicle speed.
• Rear parking sensors prioritised:
Automatically lower audio volume
while reversing.
Date/Time
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Date/Time].
• Set time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen.
• Time format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats.
• Set date: Set the date displayed on
the audio screen.
4-32
Multimedia System
Bluetooth
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
➟ Select [Bluetooth].
• Connections: Control pairing, dele-
tion, connection and disconnection
of Bluetooth
®
devices.
• Auto connection priority: Set the
connection priority of Bluetooth
®
devices when the vehicle is started.
• Update contacts: Contacts can be
downloaded from connected
Bluetooth
®
devices.
• Bluetooth voice guidance: Play or
mute voice prompts for Bluetooth
®
device pairing, connection and
errors.
Information
• When paired devices are deleted,
the call history and contacts of the
device saved to the audio system are
deleted.
• For Bluetooth
®
connections with
low connection priority, some time
may be required for the connection
to be established.
• Contacts can be downloaded only
from the currently connected
Bluetooth
®
device.
• If no Bluetooth
®
device is connected,
the Download Contacts button is
disabled.
• If the language setting is Slovakian
or Hungarian, Bluetooth voice guid-
ance is not supported.
System
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[System].
• Language: Change the user lan-
guage.
• Default: Reset the audio system.
Information
The system resets to the default val-
ues, and all saved data and settings
are lost.
Display Off
To prevent glare, the screen can be
turned off with the audio system in
operation.
Press the [SETUP/CLOCK] button
on the audio system ➟ Select
[Display Off].
Information
Use ‘Screensaver’ to set the informa-
tion to be displayed when the screen is
turned off.
i
i
i
4-33
Multimedia System
4
DDeeccllaarraattiioonn ooff CCoonnffoorrmmiittyy
CE for EU
Driving your vehicle
Before driving.........................................................5-4
Before entering the vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before starting...................................................................5-4
Ignition switch ........................................................5-6
Key ignition switch............................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button................................................5-9
Manual transmission............................................5-16
Manual transmission operation ...................................5-16
Good driving practices...................................................5-18
Dual clutch transmission.....................................5-19
Dual clutch transmission operation............................5-19
Parking...............................................................................5-26
Good driving practices...................................................5-26
Braking system.....................................................5-28
Power brakes ...................................................................5-28
Disc brakes wear indicator...........................................5-29
Parking brake...................................................................5-29
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-31
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-33
Vehicle Stability Management......................................5-36
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-37
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) ......................................5-37
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)......................................5-38
Good braking practices..................................................5-40
Four wheel drive (4WD)......................................5-41
4WD operation.................................................................5-42
Emergency precautions.................................................5-45
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system...........................5-47
To activate the ISG system...........................................5-47
To deactivate the ISG system ......................................5-51
ISG system malfunction.................................................5-51
The battery sensor deactivation.................................5-52
Drive mode integrated control system .............5-53
Blind-spot collision warning (BCW) system ....5-55
BCW ....................................................................................5-56
RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning).........5-58
Detecting sensor .............................................................5-60
Limitations of the system .............................................5-61
Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA)
system-sensor fusion type
(Front radar + Front camera)............................5-63
System setting and activation......................................5-63
FCA warning message and system control ..............5-65
FCA sensor........................................................................5-67
System malfunction........................................................5-69
Limitations of the system .............................................5-70
5
5
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system ...................5-76
LKA operation ..................................................................5-77
Warning light and message ..........................................5-81
Limitations of the System.............................................5-82
LKA system function change.......................................5-83
Driver attention warning (DAW) system ..........5-84
System setting and activation......................................5-84
Resetting the system .....................................................5-85
System standby ...............................................................5-86
System malfunction........................................................5-86
Speed limit control system .................................5-88
Speed Limit Control operation .....................................5-88
Cruise control .......................................................5-90
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-90
Special driving conditions...................................5-96
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-96
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-96
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-97
Driving at night................................................................5-97
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-97
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-98
Highway driving...............................................................5-98
Reducing the risk of a rollover ...................................5-99
Winter driving.....................................................5-100
Snow or icy conditions................................................5-100
Winter Precautions.......................................................5-102
Trailer towing (for europe) ..............................5-104
If you decide to pull a trailer?...................................5-105
Trailer towing equipment ............................................5-108
Driving with a trailer ....................................................5-109
Maintenance when towing a trailer.........................5-112
Vehicle weight ....................................................5-113
Overloading ....................................................................5-113
5-3
Driving your vehicle
5
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the tailgate open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle
• Be sure all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Before starting
• Make sure the hood, the tailgate,
and the doors are securely closed
and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seat belt. Check that
all passengers have fastened their
seat belt.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the mes-
sages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are car-
rying are stored properly or fas-
tened down securely.
BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be prop-
erly belted whenever the vehi-
cle is moving. For more infor-
mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedes-
trians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.
WARNING
5-5
Driving your vehicle
5
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reac-
tion time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
WARNING
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don't
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driv-
er or call a taxi.
5-6
Driving your vehicle
I
IGGNNIITTIIOONN SSWWIITTCCHH
Key ignition switch (if equipped)
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ignition switch will illuminate, pro-
vided the ignition switch is not in the
ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
(if equipped)
Never use aftermarket keyhole cov-
ers. This may generate start-up fail-
ure due to communication failure.
NOTICE
• NEVER turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK or ACC
position while the vehicle is in
motion except in an emer-
gency.
This will result in the engine
turning off and loss of power
assist for the steering and
brake systems. This may lead
to loss of directional control
and braking function, which
could cause an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in 1st gear (for
manual transmission vehicle)
or P (Park, for dual clutch
transmission vehicle) posi-
tion, apply the parking brake,
and turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle move-
ment may occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the igni-
tion switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
OAE056172L
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
5-7
Driving your vehicle
5
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
Action Notes
LOCK
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key in
at the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.
(if equipped)
ACC
Some electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition
switch to the ACC position, turn the key while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release.
ON
This is the normal key position when the engine has started.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition
switch from ACC to ON.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON
position when the engine is not running to
prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position.
The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key.
The engine will crank until you release the
key.
5-8
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
Starting the gasoline engine
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in neu-
tral.
3. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
Vehicle with dual clutch transmis-
sion:
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
i
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,
such as high heels, ski boots,
sandals, flip-flops, etc., may
interfere with your ability to
use the brake, accelerator and
clutch pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move which
can lead to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
5-9
Driving your vehicle
5
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to
the START position with the
engine running. It may damage
the starter.
• If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and turn the ignition switch to
the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
Engine Start/Stop button
(if equipped)
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-
minate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
NOTICE
OOS057001
To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine Start/
Stop button for more than two
seconds OR Rapidly press and
release the Engine Start/Stop
button three times (within three
seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine Start/
Stop button while the vehicle is
in motion except in an emer-
gency. This will result in the
engine turning off and loss of
power assist for the steering
and brake systems. This may
lead to loss of directional con-
trol and braking function,
which could cause an accident.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF posi-
tion, and take the Smart Key
with you. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
WARNING
5-10
Driving your vehicle
Engine Stop/Start button positions
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position Action Notes
OFF
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and
then press the Engine Start/Stop button.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehi-
cle from theft. (if equipped)
If the steering wheel is not locked properly
when you open the driver's door, the warning
chime will sound.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
Some electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ACC position for more than one hour, the
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release.
5-11
Driving your vehicle
5
- Vehicle with manual transmission
Button Position Action Notes
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the clutch pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, depress the clutch and
brake pedals and press the Engine Start/
Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal, the
engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→
→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF or ACC
5-12
Driving your vehicle
Engine Stop/Start button positions
- Vehicle with dual clutch transmission
Button Position Action Notes
OFF
To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-
ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to
the OFF position, but turns to the ACC posi-
tion.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehi-
cle from theft. (if equipped)
If the steering wheel is not locked properly
when you open the driver's door, the warning
chime will sound.
ACC
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
Some electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ACC position for more than one hour, the
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release tension.
5-13
Driving your vehicle
5
- Vehicle with dual clutch transmission
Button Position Action Notes
ON
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
the ON position when the engine is not run-
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
START
To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button
without depressing the brake pedal, the
engine does not start and the Engine
Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF
→
→
ACC
→→
ON
→→
OFF or ACC
5-14
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
Information
• The engine will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from the driver,
the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the " " indicator
will blink and the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will come on, and if all
doors are closed, the chime will also
sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle when using
the ACC position or if the vehicle
engine is ON.
Starting the gasoline engine
Vehicle with manual transmission:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4. Depress the clutch and brake ped-
als.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
Vehicle with dual clutch transmis-
sion:
1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
i
• Always wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle. Unsuitable shoes,
such as high heels, ski boots,
sandals, flip-flops, etc., may
interfere with your ability to
use the brake, accelerator and
clutch pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move which
can lead to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may sud-
denly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.
WARNING
5-15
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains station-
ary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. Steep accelerating and decel-
erating should be avoided.
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while start-
ing the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
Do not press the Engine Start/
Stop button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp
fuse is blown.
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normal-
ly. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If you are not able to replace
the fuse, you can start the engine
by pressing and holding the
Engine Start/Stop button for 10
seconds with the Engine Start/
Stop button in the ACC position.
For your safety always depress the
brake and/or clutch pedal before
starting the engine.
Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the pic-
ture above.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
OOS057003
5-16
Driving your vehicle
Manual transmission operation
The manual transmission has 6 for-
ward gears. The transmission is fully
synchronized in all forward gears so
shifting to either a higher or a lower
gear is easily accomplished.
To shift to R (Reverse), make sure
the vehicle has completely stopped,
and then move the shift lever to neu-
tral before moving into R (Reverse).
When you've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear
or R (Reverse):
1. Put the shift lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal.
2. Depress the clutch pedal, and
then shift into first or R (Reverse)
gear.
Information
During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transmission lubri-
cant has warmed up.
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be
depressed all the way to the floor
before:
- Starting the engine
The engine will not start without
depressing the clutch pedal.
- Shifting into gear, up shifting to the
next higher gear, or down shifting
to the next lower gear.
- Stopping the engine
Stop the vehicle safely and
depress the brake pedal and the
clutch pedal. Then shift into
N(Neutral) gear and turn off the
engine.
When releasing the clutch pedal,
release it slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be released while
driving.
i
MMAANNUUAALL TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1st gear when the vehicle
is parked on a uphill and in R
(Reverse) on a downhill, set the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
WARNING
OOS057074L
The shift lever can be moved without
pressing the button (1).
The button (1) must be pressed while
moving the shift lever.
5-17
Driving your vehicle
5
To prevent unnecessary wear or
damage to the clutch:
• Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with the
clutch on an incline, while wait-
ing for the traffic light, etc.
• Always depress the clutch pedal
down fully to prevent noise or
damage.
• Do not start with the 2nd (sec-
ond) gear engaged except when
you start on a slippery road.
• Do not drive with cargo loaded
more than required loading
capacity.
• Make sure to depress the clutch
pedal until the engine starts
completely. If you release the
clutch pedal before the engine
starts completely, the engine
may stop.
Downshifting
Downshift when you must slow down
in heavy traffic or drive up a steep
hill, to prevent engine load.
Also, downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and helps to accel-
erate when you need to increase
your speed again.
When the vehicle is going downhill,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed by providing brake power from
the engine and results in less wear
on the brakes.
To prevent damage to the engine,
clutch and transmission:
• When downshifting from 5th
gear to 4th gear, be careful not
to inadvertently push the shift
lever sideways engaging the 2nd
gear. A drastic downshift may
cause the engine speed to
increase to the point the
tachometer will enter the red-
zone.
• Do not downshift more than two
gears at a time or downshift the
gear when the engine is running
at high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher). Such a downshifting
may damage the engine, clutch
and the transmission.
NOTICENOTICE
• In case that there is not
equipped with an ignition lock
switch, if starting engine in
below conditions, the vehicle
suddenly may move.
- the parking brake is
released.
- the shift lever is not in
N(neutral) position.
- clutch pedal is not
depressed fully.
WARNING
5-18
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause the brakes and related parts
to overheat and malfunction.
When you are driving down a long
hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. Engine braking will help slow
down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you shift into R
(Reverse) to prevent damage to
the transmission.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears.
On a slippery surface, an abrupt
change in vehicle speed can cause
the drive wheels to lose traction
and may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
Do not use aggressive engine
braking (shifting from a higher
gear to a lower gear) on slip-
pery roads. This could cause
the tires to slip and may result
in an accident.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
WARNING
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
5-19
Driving your vehicle
5
• The dual clutch transmission can
be thought of as an automatically
shifting manual transmission. It
gives the driving feel of a manual
transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmis-
sion.
• When D (Drive) is selected, the
transmission will automatically shift
through the gears similar to a con-
ventional automatic transmission.
Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
sometimes be felt and heard as the
actuators engage the clutches and
the gears are selected.
• The dual clutch transmission incor-
porates a dry-type dual clutch
mechanism, which allows for better
acceleration performance and
increased fuel efficiency while driv-
ing. But it differs from a conven-
tional automatic transmission
because it does not incorporate a
torque converter. Instead, the tran-
sition from one gear to the next is
managed by clutch slip, especially
at lower speeds.
DDUUAALL CCLLUUTTCCHH TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS057004
The shift lever can freely operate.
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Press the shift button while moving the shift lever.
Manual shift mode
Dual clutch transmission operation
The dual clutch transmission has seven forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically when the shift lever
is in the D (Drive) position.
5-20
Driving your vehicle
As a result, shifts are sometimes
more noticeable, and a light vibra-
tion can be felt as the transmission
shaft speed is matched with the
engine shaft speed. This is a nor-
mal condition of the dual clutch
transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque more directly and provides
a direct-drive feeling which may
feel different from a conventional
automatic transmission. This may
be more noticeable when launch-
ing the vehicle from a stop or when
traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi-
cle speeds.
• When rapidly accelerating from a
lower vehicle speed, the engine
rpm may increase dramatically as
a result of clutch slip as the dual
clutch transmission selects the cor-
rect gear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When accelerating from a stop on
an incline, press the accelerator
smoothly and gradually to avoid
any shudder feeling or jerkiness.
• When traveling at a lower vehicle
speed, if you release the accelera-
tor pedal quickly, you may feel
engine braking before the trans-
mission changes gears. This
engine braking feeling is similar to
operating a manual transmission at
low speed.
• When driving downhill, you may
wish to move the gear shift lever to
Manual Shift mode and downshift
to a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self-
test. This is a normal sound for the
dual clutch transmission.
• During the first 1,500 km (1000
miles), you may feel that the vehi-
cle may not be smooth when accel-
erating at low speed. During this
break-in period, the shift quality
and performance of your new vehi-
cle is continuously optimized.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• Do not use aggressive engine
braking (shifting from a high-
er gear to a lower gear) on
slippery roads. This could
cause the tires to slip and may
result in an accident.
WARNING
5-21
Driving your vehicle
5
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.
DCT warning messages
This warning message is displayed
when vehicle is driven slowly on a
grade and the vehicle detects that
the brake pedal is not applied.
Steep grade
Driving up hills or on steep grades:
• To hold the vehicle on an incline
use the foot brake or the parking
brake.
• When in stop-and-go traffic on an
incline, allow a gap to form ahead
of you before moving the vehicle
forward. Then hold the vehicle on
the incline with the foot brake.
• If the vehicle is held or creeping
forward on an incline by applying
the accelerator pedal, the clutch
and transmission may overheat
which can result in damage. At this
time, a warning message will
appear on the LCD display.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
damage to the transmission.
NOTICE
OTLE055019
Due to transmission failure, you
may not continue to drive and
the position indicator and the
position indicator (D, P) on the
instrument cluster will blink. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
WARNING
5-22
Driving your vehicle
Transmission high temperature
• Under certain conditions, such as
repeated stop-and-go launches on
steep grades, sudden take off or
acceleration, or other harsh driving
conditions, the transmission clutch
temperatures will increase exces-
sively.
• When the clutch temperatures are
too high, the "Transmission temp is
high! Stop safely" warning message
will appear on the LCD display, a
chime will sound, and the transmis-
sion shifting may not be smooth.
• If this occurs, pull over to a safe
location, stop the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the brakes
and shift the vehicle to P (Park),
and allow the transmission to cool.
• If you ignore this warning, the driv-
ing condition may become worse.
You may experience abrupt shifts,
frequent shifts, or jerkiness.
• When the message "Trans cooled.
Resume driving." appears you can
continue to drive your vehicle.
• When possible, drive the vehicle
smoothly.
Transmission overheated
• If the vehicle continues to be driven
and the clutch temperatures reach
the maximum temperature limit, the
"Trans Hot! Park with engine on"
warning will be displayed. When this
occurs the clutch is disabled until the
clutch cools to normal temperatures.
• The warning will display a time to
wait for the transmission to cool.
• If this occurs, pull over to a safe
location, stop the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the brakes
and shift the vehicle to P (Park),
and allow the transmission to cool.
• When the message "Trans cooled.
Resume driving." appears you can
continue to drive your vehicle.
• When possible, drive the vehicle
smoothly.
If any of the warning messages in
the LCD display continue to blink, for
your safety, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
OPD047470N
OPD047471N/OPD047472N
5-23
Driving your vehicle
5
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above
and still cannot shift the lever out
of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock
Release" in this chapter.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a 7-gear sequence, pro-
viding the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmis-
sion will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear (or gears, as
appropriate).
NOTICE
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• When parking on an incline,
place the shift lever in P (Park)
and apply the parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill.
• For safety, always engage the
parking brake with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position
except for the case of emer-
gency parking.
WARNING
5-24
Driving your vehicle
Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.
In manual shift mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to make gearshifts rap-
idly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
Information
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected in Manual Shift Mode. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or
P (Park) position as required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is auto-
matically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is functional when
the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-
tion or the manual shift mode.
With the shift lever in the D posi-
tion
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
10km/h.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
i
OOS057069
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
OOS057006
5-25
Driving your vehicle
5
When the vehicle speed is lower
than 10 km/h, if you depress the
accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you move the shift lever
from D (Drive) to manual shift mode
and move it from manual shift mode
to D (Drive) again, the system
changes from manual mode to auto-
matic mode.
With the shift lever in the manual
shift mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
Information
If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are
pulled at the same time, gear shift may
not occur.
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the dual clutch trans-
mission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, and then do the follow-
ing:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-
driver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.
5. Move the shift lever while holding
down the screwdriver.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock
release access hole then install
the cap.
7. Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
i
OOS057005L
5-26
Driving your vehicle
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• When driving in manual shift mode,
slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flam-
mable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-27
Driving your vehicle
5
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmis-
sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
Information
- Kickdown
Mechanism (if equipped)
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point. The dual clutch transmission
will shift to a lower gear depending on
the engine speed.
i
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belt-
ed occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
WARNING
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
5-28
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Applying
the brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a tempo-
rary loss of braking perform-
ance.
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, light-
ly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintain-
ing a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes func-
tion correctly.
WARNING
5-29
Driving your vehicle
5
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
Information
Always replace brake pads as com-
plete front or rear axle sets.
Parking brake
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle, to apply:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Pull up the parking brake lever as far
as possible.
To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Slightly pull up the parking brake
lever.
While pressing the release button
(1), lower the parking brake (2).
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
i
NOTICE
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-
ate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
OOS057010
OOS057011
5-30
Driving your vehicle
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the park-
ing brake engaged, a warning
will sound. Damage to the park-
ing brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the braking system
and cause premature wear or
damage to brake parts. Make sure
the parking brake is released and
the Brake Warning Light is off
before driving.
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON posi-
tion (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
NOTICE
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the
1st gear (for manual transmis-
sion vehicle) or P (Park, for
dual clutch transmission vehi-
cle) position, then apply the
parking brake, and place the
ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• When parking on an incline,
block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from rolling down.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-31
Driving your vehicle
5
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or dis-
tance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather con-
ditions.
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehi-
cle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for vehicles
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
WARNING
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
5-32
Driving your vehicle
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-
ty. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-
ing wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake sys-
tem may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light ( ) will stay
on for several seconds after the
Ignition switch is placed in the ON
position. During that time, the ABS
will go through self-diagnosis and the
light will go off if everything is nor-
mal. If the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your ABS. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and apply your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light ( ) may illuminate. Pull
your vehicle over to a safe place
and turn the engine off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with your ABS system. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Information
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light ( ) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
i
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light ( ) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normal-
ly. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, we recommend
that you contact your HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
5-33
Driving your vehicle
5
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) (if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle's brakes
and intervenes in the engine man-
agement system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approxi-
mately three seconds and goes off,
then the ESC is turned on.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ESC is
active.
OOS057012
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
WARNING
5-34
Driving your vehicle
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under routine
conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the Cruise
Control automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be reen-
gaged when the road conditions
allow. See "Cruise Control System"
later in this chapter. (if equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolutions per minute)
may not increase even if you press
the accelerator pedal deeply. This is
to maintain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message "Traction Control disabled"
will illuminate. In this state, the trac-
tion control function of ESC (engine
management) is disabled, but the
brake control function of ESC (brak-
ing management) still operates.
• State 2
Press and hold the ESC OFF button
continuously for more than 3 sec-
onds. The ESC OFF indicator light
and message "Traction & Stability
Control disabled" illuminates and a
warning chime sounds. In this state,
both the traction control function of
ESC (engine management) and the
brake control function of ESC (brak-
ing management) are disabled.
If the ignition switch is placed in the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
vehicle, the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
Indicator lights
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC indicator light illu-
minates, then goes off if the ESC
system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever the ESC is operating.
If the ESC indicator light stays on,
your vehicle may have a malfunction
with the ESC system. When this
warning light illuminates we recom-
mend that the vehicle be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
5-35
Driving your vehicle
5
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized wheels and tires
installed.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud, by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC, to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
To prevent damage to the trans-
mission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and parking brake
warning lights are displayed.
The repairs would not be cov-
ered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessive-
ly while these lights are dis-
played.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).
Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system opera-
tion.
i
NOTICE
NOTICE
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER attempt
to accelerate. NEVER turn the
ESC off while the ESC indicator
light is blinking or you may lose
control of the vehicle resulting in
an accident.
WARNING
5-36
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle Stability Management
(if equipped)
The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking sud-
denly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 15 km/h (9 mph) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 20 km/h (12 mph) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-
sation in the brake pedal. This is nor-
mal and it means your VSM is active.
Information
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on a banked road such as
gradient or incline.
• Driving in reverse.
• The ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• The EPS (Electric power steering)
warning light ( ) is on or blinks.
i
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions.The VSM sys-
tem will not prevent acci-
dents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
WARNING
5-37
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the VSM
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized tires and wheels
installed.
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
(if equipped)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releas-
es the brake after 2 seconds or when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Information
• The HAC does not operate when the
shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral).
• The HAC activates even when the
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is
off. However, it does not activate,
when the ESC does not operate nor-
mally.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
(if equipped)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking
the stop lights, while sharply and
severely braking.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops. (The
deceleration power exceeds 7 m/s
2
,
and the driving speed exceeds 55
km/h (34 mph).)
• The ABS is activated and the driv-
ing speed exceeds 55 km/h (34
mph).
The hazard warning flasher automat-
ically turns ON after blinking the stop
lights:
• When the driving speed is under
40 km/h (25 mph),
• When the ABS is deactivated, and
• When the sudden braking situation
is over.
i
NOTICE
If the ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light ( ) stays
or blinks, your vehicle may have
a malfunction with the VSM sys-
tem. When the warning light illu-
minates we recommend that the
vehicle be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
WARNING
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline. The HAC acti-
vates only for approximately 2
seconds.
WARNING
5-38
Driving your vehicle
The hazard warning flasher turns
OFF:
• When the vehicle drives at a low
speed for a certain period of time.
The driver can manually turn OFF the
hazard warning flasher by pressing
the button.
Information
The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) sys-
tem will not activate, when the hazard
warning flashers are already on.
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
supports the driver come down a
steep hill without depressing the
brake pedal.
It slows down the vehicle under 8
km/h (5 mph) (for dual clutch trans-
mission vehicles) or 8 km/h (5 mph)
(for manual transaxle vehicles) and
lets the driver concentrate on steer-
ing the vehicle.
• The DBC defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition
switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
• Noise or vibration may occur
from the brakes when the DBC is
activated.
• The rear stop light comes on
when DBC is activated.
NOTICE
i
OOS057058
Always turn off the DBC on nor-
mal roads. The DBC might acti-
vate inadvertently from the
standby mode when driving
through speed bumps or mak-
ing sharp curves.
WARNING
5-39
Driving your vehicle
5
DBC operation
• The DBC may not deactivate on
steep inclines even though the
brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed.
• Do not turn on the DBC when
driving with shift lever in 3rd
gear (and above) for vehicles
with manual transmission. The
engine may stop if the DBC sys-
tem is activated.
• The DBC does not operate when:
- The shift lever is in P (Park).
- The ESC is activated.
NOTICE
Standby
Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under
40km/h (25mph). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over
40km/h (25mph).
In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 35km/h
(22mph) while driving down a steep hill, the DBC will
activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deacti-
vate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
•
The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automat-
ically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
• The DBC button is pressed again.
• Vehicle speed is over 60km/h (38mph).
Activated
Temporarily
deactivated
OFF
Mode Indicator light Description
blinks
illuminated
not
illuminated
illuminated
If the DBC red indicator light
illuminates, the system may
have overheated or have mal-
functioned. When the warning
light illuminates even though
the DBC system has cooled off,
we recommend that the vehicle
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
5-40
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and we recommend that you
call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling for-
ward.
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a com-
plete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF posi-
tion.
Vehicles parked with the park-
ing brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadver-
tently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.
WARNING
5-41
Driving your vehicle
5
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
System delivers engine power to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. 4WD is useful when extra
traction is required on roads such
slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-cov-
ered roads.
Occasional off-road use such as
established unpaved roads and trails
are OK. It is always important that
the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed
the safe operating speed for those
conditions.
• Do not drive in water if the level
is higher than the bottom of the
vehicle.
• Check your brake condition
once you are out of mud or
water. Depress the brake pedal
several times as you move slow-
ly until you feel normal braking
return.
• Shorten your scheduled mainte-
nance interval if you drive in off-
road conditions such as sand,
mud or water (see "Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions"
in chapter 7).
• Always wash your vehicle thor-
oughly after off road use, espe-
cially the bottom of the vehicle.
• Be sure to equip the vehicle with
four tires of the same size and
type.
• Make sure that a full time 4WD
vehicle is towed by a flat bed
tow truck.
NOTICE
FFOOUURR WWHHEEEELL DDRRIIVVEE ((44WWDD)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS057057
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• Do not drive in conditions that
exceed the vehicles intended
design such as challenging
off-road conditions.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of a rollover is great-
ly increased if you lose con-
trol of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
WARNING
5-42
Driving your vehicle
4WD operation
In the 4WD LOCK mode, the system is deactivated when vehi-
cle speed is over 30 km/h (19mph) and the mode is shifted to
4WD AUTO mode. If the vehicle speed slows down to 30 km/h
(19mph), the mode shifts back to the 4WD LOCK mode.
Use this mode when driving up or down steep inclines, driving
off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximize
traction
4WD AUTO
(4WD LOCK is
deactivated)
(not illuminated)
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
In the 4WD AUTO mode, under normal operating conditions,
the vehicle operates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles. If the
system determines there is a need for four wheel drive, the
engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels automat-
ically.
Use this mode when driving on normal roads.
4WD LOCK
(illuminated)
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) mode selection
If 4WD warning light ( ) stays on the instrument cluster, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the
4WD system. When the 4WD warning light ( ) illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
5-43
Driving your vehicle
5
When the 4WD LOCK mode is
deactivated, a sensation may be
felt as the driving power is deliv-
ered entirely to the front wheels.
For safe 4WD operation
Before driving
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
• Sit upright and closer to the steer-
ing wheel than usual. Adjust the
steering wheel to a position com-
fortable for you to drive.
Driving on snow-covered or icy
roads
• Start off slowly by applying the
accelerator pedal gently.
• Use snow tires or tire chains.
• Keep sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you.
• Use engine braking during deceler-
ation.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns to prevent skids.
Driving in sand or mud
• Maintain slow and constant speed.
• Use tire chains driving in mud if
necessary.
• Keep sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you.
• Reduce vehicle speed and always
check the road condition.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns to prevent getting
stuck.
NOTICE
When driving on normal roads,
deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode
by pushing the 4WD LOCK but-
ton (4WD LOCK indicator light
goes off). Driving on normal
roads with the 4WD LOCK
mode, especially, when corner-
ing may cause mechanical
noise or vibration. The noise
and vibration will disappear
when the 4WD LOCK mode is
deactivated. Prolong driving
with the noise and vibration
may damage some parts of the
power train.
CAUTION
When the vehicle is stuck in
snow, sand or mud, place a non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction OR
Slowly spin the wheels in for-
ward and reverse directions
which causes a rocking motion
that may free the vehicle.
However, avoid running the
engine continuously at high
rpm, doing so may damage the
4WD system.
CAUTION
5-44
Driving your vehicle
Driving up or down hills
• Driving uphill
- Before starting off, check if it is
possible to drive uphill.
- Drive as straight as possible.
• Driving downhill
- Do not change gear while driving
downhill. Select gear before driv-
ing downhill.
- Driveas slowly using engine brak-
ing while driving downhill.
- Drive straight as possible.
Driving through water
• Try to avoid driving in deep stand-
ing water. It may stall your engine
and clog your exhaust pipes.
• If you need to drive in water, stop
your vehicle, set the vehicle in
4WD LOCK mode and drive under
8 km/h (5mph).
• Do not change gear while driving in
water.
OLMB053017
Exercise extreme caution driv-
ing up or down steep hills. The
vehicle may flip depending on
the grade, terrain and water/
mud conditions.
WARNING
OLMB053018
Do not drive across the contour
of steep hills. A slight change in
the wheel angle can destabilize
the vehicle, or a stable vehicle
may lose stability if the vehicle
stops its forward motion. Your
vehicle may roll over and lead to
a serious injury or death.
WARNING
Always drive slowly in water. If
you drive too fast, water may
get into the engine compart-
ment and wet the ignition sys-
tem causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop.
CAUTION
5-45
Driving your vehicle
5
Additional driving conditions
• Become familiar with the off-road
conditions before driving.
• Always pay attention when driving
off-road and avoid dangerous
areas.
• Drive slowly when driving in heavy
wind.
• Reduce vehicle speed when cor-
nering. The center of gravity of
4WD vehicles is higher than con-
ventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you rapidly turn corners.
• Always hold the steering wheel
firmly when you are driving off-
road.
Emergency precautions
Tires
Do not use tire and wheel with differ-
ent size and type from the one origi-
nally installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and performance of
your vehicle, which could lead to
steering failure or rollover causing
serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you equip your vehicle with any
tire/wheel combination not recom-
mended by HYUNDAI for off-road
driving, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.
OOS057075L
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to an impact
with objects on the ground. You
could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel which may lead to
serious injury or death.
WARNING
Never start or run the engine
while a full-time 4WD vehicle is
raised on a jack.The vehicle can
slip or roll off of a jack causing
serious injury or death to you or
those nearby.
WARNING
5-46
Driving your vehicle
Towing
4WD vehicles must be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equip-
ment with all the wheels off the
ground. For more information, refer
to "Towing" in chapter 6.
Dynamometer testing
A full-time 4WD vehicle must be test-
ed on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.
A full-time 4WD vehicle should not
be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following procedure:
1.Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2.Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3.Release the parking brake.
4.Place the rear wheels on the tem-
porary free roller as shown in the
illustration.
OOS057009
Roll Tester (Speedometer)
Temporary Free Roller
• Never engage the parking
brake while performing the
test.
• When the vehicle is lifted up,
do not operate the front and
rear wheel separately. All four
wheels should be operated.
CAUTION
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. The
vehicle can jump forward and
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING
5-47
Driving your vehicle
5
The ISG system is to reduce the fuel
consumption by automatically shut-
ting down the engine, when the vehi-
cle is at a standstill (i.e. red stop light,
stop sign, and traffic jam).
The engine is automatically started
upon satisfying the starting condi-
tions.
The ISG system is always active,
when the engine is running.
Information
When the engine is automatically
started by the ISG system, some warn-
ing lights (i.e. ABS, ESC, ESC OFF,
EPS, and parking brake warning
light) may illuminate for a few sec-
onds due to the low battery voltage.
However, it does not indicate a mal-
function with the ISG system.
To activate the ISG system
Prerequisite for activation
The ISG system operates in the fol-
lowing situations.
- The driver's seatbelt is fastened.
- The driver's door and the hood are
closed.
- The brake vacuum pressure is
adequate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is between
-20 °C and 35 °C (-4 °F and 95 °F).
- The engine coolant temperature is
not too low.
- The system is not in the diagnostic
mode.
- The steering wheel is not steered
excessively. (for dual clutch trans-
mission vehicle)
- The vehicle is driven on a steep
incline. (for dual clutch transmis-
sion vehicle)
Information
• The ISG system is not activated,
when the prerequisites to activate
the ISG system are unsatisfied. In
this case, the ISG OFF button indi-
cator illuminates, and the auto stop
indicator ( ) illuminates in yellow
on the instrument cluster.
• When the above indicator remains
illuminated on the instrument clus-
ter, we recommend that you have
the IGS system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
i
IISSGG ((IIDDLLEE SSTTOOPP AANNDD GGOO)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS057013
5-48
Driving your vehicle
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
Manual transmission vehicle
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to 5
km/h (3 mph).
2. Set the gear in N (Neutral).
3. Release the clutch pedal.
The auto stop indicator ( ) illumi-
nates in green on the instrument
cluster, when the engine stops.
Information
The driving speed must reach at least
10 km/h (6 mph) after an idle stop to
stop the engine in idle stop mode
again.
Dual clutch transmission vehicle
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to 0
km/h.
2. Depress the brake pedal with the
shift lever in D (Drive) or N
(Neutral).
The auto stop indicator ( ) illumi-
nates in green on the instrument
cluster, when the engine stops.
Information
The driving speed must reach at least
8 km/h (5 mph) after an idle stop to
stop the engine in idle stop mode
again.
In auto stop mode, when the driver
opens the hood, the ISG system will
be deactivated.
When the system is deactivated:
The ISG OFF button indicator illumi-
nates.
i
i
OOS057059L
OOS057088L
5-49
Driving your vehicle
5
The message, "Auto Stop deactivat-
ed. Start manually", appears on the
LCD display with a beep sound.
At this time, restart the vehicle man-
ually by:
Manual transmission vehicle
Depressing the clutch and brake
pedal with the gear in neutral.
Dual clutch transmission vehicle
Depressing the brake pedal with the
shift lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
But for your safety, restart the vehicle
in the P (Park) position.
Auto start
To restart the engine in the auto
stop mode
Manual transmission vehicle
• Depress the clutch pedal with the
gear in N (Neutral).
The auto stop indicator ( ) goes
OFF on the instrument cluster, when
the engine is restarted.
Dual clutch transmission vehicle
• Release the brake pedal.
• When Auto Hold is activated, if you
release the brake pedal, the
engine will be in the auto stop
state. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal, the engine will
start again.
The auto stop indicator ( ) goes
OFF on the instrument cluster, when
the engine is restarted.
The engine is automatically restart-
ed in the following situations.
- The fan speed of the manual cli-
mate control system is set above
the 3rd position, with the air condi-
tion ON.
- The fan speed of the automatic cli-
mate control system is set above
the 6th position, with the air condi-
tion ON.
- A certain period of time has
elapsed with the air condition ON.
- The defroster is activated.
- The brake vacuum pressure is low.
- The battery is weak.
- The driving speed exceeds 5 km/h
(3 mph). (for manual transmission
vehicle)
- The driving speed exceeds 2 km/h
(1.2 mph). (for dual clutch trans-
mission vehicle)
- The vehicle is shifted to P (Park) or
R (Reverse) when the brake pedal
is depressed.
OTLE055036
5-50
Driving your vehicle
- The door is opened or seat belt is
unfastened when the brake pedal
is depressed.
The auto stop indicator ( ) blinks
in green for 5 seconds on the instru-
ment cluster and a message "Auto
Start" will appear on the LCD display.
The auto start is temporarily deac-
tivated in the following situations.
Manual transmission vehicle
When the gear is shifted without the
clutch pedal depressed. A message
"Press clutch pedal for Auto Start"
will appear on the LCD display. To
activate auto start, shift to neutral
and depress the clutch pedal.
Dual clutch transmission vehicle
When the shift lever is shifted from N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or
Manual shift mode without the brake
pedal depressed. A message "Press
brake pedal for Auto Start" will
appear on the LCD display. To acti-
vate auto start, depress the brake
pedal.
OTLE055037
OAD055087L
5-51
Driving your vehicle
5
To deactivate the ISG system
• Press the ISG OFF button to deac-
tivate the ISG system. Then, the
ISG OFF button indicator illumi-
nates, and the message "Auto
Stop System Off" appears on the
LCD display.
• Press the ISG OFF button again to
reactivate the ISG system. Then,
the ISG OFF button indicator turns
OFF.
ISG system malfunction
The ISG system may not operate:
When there is a malfunction with the
ISG sensors or the ISG system.
The followings occur, when there is
a malfunction with the ISG system:
• The auto stop indicator ( ) will
blink in yellow on the instrument
cluster.
• The light on the ISG OFF button
will illuminate.
Information
• When you cannot turn OFF the ISG
OFF button indicator by pressing the
ISG OFF button, or when the mal-
function with the ISG system per-
sists, we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• You can turn off the ISG OFF but-
ton indicator by driving over 80
km/h (50 mph) for up to 2 hours
with the fan speed below the 2nd
position. If the ISG OFF button
indicator remains ON, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
i
When the engine is in auto stop
mode, the engine may restart.
Before leaving the vehicle or
checking the engine compart-
ment, stop the engine by plac-
ing the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position or remov-
ing the ignition key.
WARNING
5-52
Driving your vehicle
The battery sensor deactiva-
tion
[A] : Battery sensor
The battery sensor is deactivated,
when the battery is disconnected
from the negative pole for mainte-
nance purpose.
In this case, the ISG system is limit-
edly operated due to the battery sen-
sor deactivation. Thus, the driver
needs to take the following proce-
dures to reactivate the battery sen-
sor after disconnecting the battery.
Prerequisites to reactivate the
battery sensor
Keep the engine in the OFF status
for 4 hours, and attempt to restart the
engine 3 to 4 times for the battery-
sensor reactivation.
Pay extreme caution not to connect
any accessories (i.e. navigation and
black box) to the vehicle with the
engine in the OFF status. If not, the
battery sensor may not be reactivat-
ed.
Information
The ISG system may not operate in
the following situations.
- There is a malfunction with the IGS
system.
- The battery is weak.
- The brake vacuum pressure is low.
In those cases, we recommend that
you have the ISG system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only the genuine HYUNDAI
ISG battery for replacement. If
not, the ISG system may not nor-
mally operate.
• Do not recharge the ISG battery
with a general battery charger. If
not, it may damage or explode
the ISG battery.
• Do not remove the battery cap. If
not, the battery electrolyte,
which is harmful to the human
body, may leak out.
NOTICE
i
OOS057015L
5-53
Driving your vehicle
5
DDRRIIVVEE MMOODDEE IINNTTEEGGRRAATTEEDD CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver's preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the COM-
FORT mode (except if it is in ECO
mode), when the engine is restarted.
Information
If there is a problem with the instru-
ment cluster, the drive mode will be in
COMFORT mode and may not
change to SPORT mode.
The mode changes, as below,
whenever the DRIVE MODE button
is pressed.
When COMFORT mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
ECO mode (if equipped)
When the Drive Mode is
set to ECO mode, the
engine and transmission
control logic are changed
to maximize fuel efficiency.
• When the ECO mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the ECO indicator will illuminate.
• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode,
when the engine is turned OFF and
restarted, the Drive Mode setting
will remain in ECO mode.
Information
Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's
driving habit and road condition.
When ECO mode is activated:
• The acceleration response may be
slightly reduced as the accelerator
pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the dual clutch
transmission may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when ECO mode is acti-
vated, to improve fuel efficiency.
i
i
OOS057060
ECO
(if equipped)
COMFORT SPORT
5-54
Driving your vehicle
Limitation of ECO mode opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
ECO mode is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
engine torque is restricted.
• When driving the vehicle with the
dual clutch transmission gear shift
lever in manual shift mode:
The system will be limited due to
the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few seconds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode manages
the driving dynamics by
automatically adjusting the
steering effort, the engine
and transmission control
logic for enhanced driving
performance.
• When SPORT mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the SPORT indicator will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted,
the Drive Mode will revert back to
COMFORT mode. If SPORT mode
is desired, re-select SPORT mode
from the DRIVE MODE button.
• When SPORT mode is activated:
- The engine rpm will tend to remain
raised over a certain length of time
even after releasing the accelerator
- Upshifts are delayed when accel-
erating
Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
COMFORT mode
COMFORT mode is a
base mode.
When COMFORT mode is selected
by pressing the DRIVE MODE but-
ton, the COMFORT indicator will illu-
minate.
If the vehicle is set to COMFORT
mode, when the engine is turned
OFF and restarted, the Drive Mode
setting will remain in COMFORT
mode.
i
5-55
Driving your vehicle
5
[A] : Blind spot area
[B] : Closing at high speed
The Blind-spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system uses radar sensors in
the rear bumper to monitor and warn
the driver of an approaching vehicle
in the driver's blind spot area.
The system monitors the rear area of
the vehicle and provides information
to the driver with an audible alert and
an indicator on the outside rearview
mirrors.
(1) BCW : Blind spot area
The BCW range varies relative to
vehicle speed. Note that if your
vehicle is traveling much faster
than the vehicles around you, the
warning will not occur.
(2) BCW : Closing at high speed
The BCW-Closing at high speed
feature will alert you when a vehi-
cle is approaching in an adjacent
lane at a high rate of speed. If the
driver activates the turn signal
when the system detects an
oncoming vehicle, the system
sounds an audible alert. Distance
from the approaching vehicle can
be seen differently according to
the relative speed.
(3) RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning)
The RCCW feature monitors
approaching cross traffic from the
left and right side of the vehicle
when your vehicle is in reverse.
The feature will operate when the
vehicle is moving in reverse below
about 10 km/h (6 mph). If oncom-
ing cross traffic is detected a
warning chime will sound.
Distance from the approaching
vehicle can be seen differently
according to the relative speed.
BBLLIINNDD--SSPPOOTT CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((BBCCWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS057099L
A
B
5-56
Driving your vehicle
BCW (if equipped)
Operating conditions
To operate:
Press the BCW switch with the
Ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator on the BCW switch will
illuminate. When the vehicle speed
exceeds 30 km/h (20 mph), the sys-
tem will be activated.
To cancel:
Press the BCW switch again. The
indicator on the switch will go off.
When the system is not used, turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
Information
• If the vehicle is turned off then on
again, the BCW system returns to
the previous state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the outside rearview
mirror.
The function will activate when:
1. The function is on.
2. The vehicle speed is above
approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
3. An oncoming vehicle is detected in
the blind spot area.
i
OOS057023
• Always be aware of road con-
ditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situa-
tions even though the Blind-
Spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system is operating.
• The Blind-spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system is not
a substitute for proper and
safe driving. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes or backing up
the vehicle. The Blind-spot
Collision Warning (BCW) sys-
tem may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
WARNING
5-57
Driving your vehicle
5
First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a yellow
warning light will illuminate on the
outside rearview mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off depending on
the driving conditions of the vehicle.
OOS057024
■ Left side
■ Right side
OOS057025
■ Left side
OOS057026
■ Right side
[A] : Warning sound
Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mirror (i.e, in
the first stage alert)) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being
detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outside rearview mir-
ror will also blink.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert (the warning
chime and the blinking warning light on the outside rearview mirror) will be
deactivated.
5-58
Driving your vehicle
• The warning chime may be deacti-
vated.
- To deactivate the warning chime:
Go to the "User Settings → Driver
Assistance and deselect Blind-spot
Collision Warning sound" on the
LCD display.
- To activate the warning chime:
Go to the "User Settings → Driver
Assistance and select Blind-spot
Collision Warning sound" on the
LCD display.
Information
The warning chime function helps
alert the driver. Deactivate this func-
tion only when it is necessary.
Refer to "User settings mode" in
chapter 3 for more details.
RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic
Collision Warning)
(if equipped)
The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
warning function monitors approach-
ing cross traffic from the left and right
side of the vehicle when your vehicle
is in reverse.
Operating conditions
To operate:
Go to the 'User Settings → Driver
Assistance and select Rear Cross-
Traffic Collision warning' on the LCD
display.
The system will turn on and standby
to activate. If you deactivate this
function in the cluster, the system will
stop.
Refer to "User settings mode" in
chapter 3 for more details.
Information
If the vehicle is turned off then on
again, the BCW system returns to the
previous state.
The system will activate when vehicle
speed is below 10 km/h (6.2 mph) and
with the shift lever in R (Reverse).
The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
warning detecting range is approxi-
mately 0.5 m ~ 20 m (1 ft ~ 65 ft) in the
direction of both lateral sides of the
vehicle. An approaching vehicle will
be detected if their vehicle speed is
within 4 km/h ~ 36 km/h (2.5 ~ 22.5
mph).
Note that the detecting range may
vary under certain conditions. As
always, use caution and pay close
attention to your surroundings when
backing up your vehicle.
i
i
5-59
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning type
If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound, the warning
light on the outside rearview mirror
will blink and a message will appear
on the LCD display.
Information
• The warning chime will turn off
when:
- The detected vehicle moves out of
the sensing area or
- when the vehicle is right behind
your vehicle or
- when the vehicle is not approach-
ing your vehicle or
- when the other vehicle slows down.
• The system may not operate properly
due to other factors or circumstances.
Always pay attention to your sur-
roundings.
• If the sensing area near the rear
bumper is blocked by either a wall
or barrier or by a parked vehicle,
the system sensing area may be
reduced.
i
■ Left ■ Right
OOS057031/OOS057032
• When BCW is activated, the
warning light on the outside
rearview mirror will illuminate
whenever a vehicle is detect-
ed at the rear side by the sys-
tem.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind-spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA). Do not
solely rely on the system but
check your surrounding
before changing lanes or
backing the vehicle up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surround-
ings while driving.
WARNING
5-60
Driving your vehicle
• The system may not work prop-
erly when the bumper has been
damaged, or if the rear bumper
has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs some-
what according to the width of
the road. When the road is nar-
row, the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane
OR when the road is wide, the
system may not detect other
vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for proper operation of the system.
Warning message
Blind-Spot Collision Warning
(BCW) system disabled.
Radar blocked
• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object.
- Driving in rural areas where the
BCW sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time.
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain.
NOTICE
• The Blind-spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system and
Rear Cross-Traffic Collision
warning (RCCW) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always
drive safely and use caution
when changing lanes or back-
ing up your vehicle. The Blind-
spot Collision Warning (BCW)
system may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
OOS057027
OOS057077L
5-61
Driving your vehicle
5
- A trailer or carrier is installed. To
use the BCW system, remove the
trailer or carrier from your vehicle.
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BCW switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
When the BCW canceled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the BCW system should operate nor-
mally after about 10 minutes of driv-
ing the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
Turn off the system by pressing the
BCW switch and deselecting Rear
Cross-Traffic Collision warning
(RCCW) from the User Settings mode
on the cluster, when using a trailer or
carrier behind your vehicle.
Check Blind-Spot Collision
Warning (BCW) system
If there is a problem with the BCW
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch
will turn off. The system will turn off
automatically. We recommend that
you have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Limitations of the system
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the sys-
tem may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
• When a trailer or carrier is
installed.
• The vehicle drives in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
• The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
• The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.
• The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
• The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in the
luggage compartment, abnormal
tire pressure, etc.
• When the temperature near the
rear bumper area is high or low.
i
■ Type A ■ Type B
OOS057078L/OOS057079L
5-62
Driving your vehicle
• When the sensors are blocked by
other vehicles, walls or parking-lot
pillars.
• The vehicle drives on a curved
road or through a tollgate.
• The vehicle is driven near areas
containing metal substances such
as a construction zone, railroad,
etc.
• There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail, per-
son, animal, etc.
• While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
• When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
• When driving on wet surfaces.
• When driving through a large area
with few vehicles or structures
around, such as a desert, rural
area, etc.
• A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
• When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle.
• When the other vehicle approach-
es very close.
• When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
• While changing lanes.
• If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
• When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
• When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane to
you.
• The vehicle is turning left or right at
a crossroads.
• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
• A flat trailer is near.
• If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart, a baby stroller or pedestrian.
• If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car.
The BCW indicator on the outer
side view mirror may not illuminate
properly when:
• The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is damaged.
• The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
• The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris.
• The window is tinted.
5-63
Driving your vehicle
5
The Forward Collision-avoidance
Assist (FCA) system is designed to
help detect and monitor the vehicle
ahead or detect a pedestrian (if
equipped) in the roadway through
radar signals and camera recognition
to warn the driver that a collision is
imminent, and if necessary, apply
emergency braking.
System setting and activation
System setting
• The driver can activate the FCA by
placing the ignition switch to the
ON position and by selecting:
"User Settings → Driver assistance
→ Forward Collision-avoidance
Assist (FCA)"
The FCA deactivates, when the driv-
er cancels the system setting.
The warning light illumi-
nates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the FCA
system. The driver can
monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. Also, the warning
light illuminates when the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) is
turned off. If the warning light
remains ON when the FCA is acti-
vated, we recommend that you have
the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN--AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE AASSSSIISSTT ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM
-
- SSEENNSSOORR FFUUSSIIOONN TTYYPPEE ((FFRROONNTT RRAADDAARR ++ FFRROONNTT CCAAMMEERRAA)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Take the following precautions
when using the Forward
Collision-avoidance Assist
(FCA) system:
• This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not
intended to, nor does it
replace the need for extreme
care and attention of the driv-
er. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sen-
sors are limited. Pay attention
to the road conditions at all
times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road condi-
tions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sud-
den situations from occur-
ring. FCA does not stop the
vehicle completely and is not
a collision avoidance system.
WARNING
5-64
Driving your vehicle
• The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time on the LCD dis-
play.
Go to the "User Settings → Driver
assistance → Forward Collision
Warning → Late/Normal/Early".
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning includes the fol-
lowing:
- Early:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated earlier than
normal. This setting maximizes the
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
Even though, 'Early' is selected if
the front vehicle suddenly stops
the initial warning activation time
may not seem fast.
If you feel the warning activates too
early, set the Forward Collision
Warning to "Normal".
- Normal:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated normally. This
setting allows for a nominal
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
- Late:
When this condition is selected,
the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated later than nor-
mal. This setting reduces the
amount of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
Select 'Late' when traffic is light
and when driving speed is slow.
Prerequisite for activation
The FCA gets ready to be activated,
when the FCA is selected on the
LCD display, and when the following
prerequisites are satisfied.
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is on.
- Vehicle speed is over 10 km/h (6
mph). (The FCA is only activated
within a certain speed range.)
- The system detects a pedestrian
or a vehicle in front, which may col-
lide with your vehicle. (The FCA
may not be activated or may sound
a warning alarm in accordance
with the driving situation or vehicle
condition.)
5-65
Driving your vehicle
5
FCA warning message and
system control
The FCA produces warning mes-
sages and warning alarms in accor-
dance with the collision risk levels,
such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-
cle in front, insufficient braking dis-
tance, or pedestrian detection. Also,
it controls the brakes in accordance
with the collision risk levels.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the LCD display. The
options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning include Early,
Normal or Late initial warning time.
Collision Warning
(First warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime. Additionally, some vehicle
system intervention occurs by the
engine management system to help
decelerate the vehicle.
- Your vehicle speed may deceler-
ate moderately.
- The FCA system limitedly con-
trols the brakes to preemptively
mitigate impact in a collision.
• Completely stop the vehicle
on a safe location before
operating the switch on the
steering wheel to activate/
deactivate the FCA system.
• The FCA automatically acti-
vates upon placing the Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON
position. The driver can deac-
tivate the FCA by canceling
the system setting on the LCD
display.
• The FCA automatically deacti-
vates upon canceling the ESC
(Electronic Stability Control).
When the ESC is canceled,
the FCA cannot be activated
on the LCD display. The FCA
warning light will illuminate
which is normal.
WARNING
OOS057016L
5-66
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking
(Second warning)
This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decel-
erate the vehicle.
- The FCA system limitedly con-
trols the brakes to preemptively
mitigate impact in a collision. The
brake control is maximized just
before a collision.
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver's depressing the brake pedal.
• The FCA provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the accelerator
pedal, or when the driver abruptly
operates the steering wheel.
• The FCA brake control is automat-
ically canceled, when risk factors
disappear.
OOS057017L
The driver should always use
extreme caution while operating
the vehicle, whether or not there
is a warning message or alarm
from the FCA system.
CAUTION
The braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.
WARNING
Never deliberately drive danger-
ously to activate the system.
WARNING
The FCA system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
FCA system.
WARNING
5-67
Driving your vehicle
5
FCA sensor
In order for the FCA system to oper-
ate properly, always make sure the
sensor cover or sensor is clean and
free of dirt, snow, and debris.
Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on
the lens may adversely affect the
sensing performance of the sensor.
• Do not apply license plate mold-
ing or foreign objects such as a
bumper sticker or a bumper
guard near the radar sensor.
Doing so may adversely affect
the sensing performance of the
radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and cover clean and free of dirt
and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressur-
ized water directly on the sensor
or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper
alignment, the FCA system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the
radar sensor, the FCA system
may not operate properly. We
recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine parts to repair
or replace a damaged sensor or
sensor cover. Do not apply paint
to the sensor cover.
NOTICE
OOS057018
OOS057033
■ Front radar
■ Front camera
5-68
Driving your vehicle
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front wind-
shield, nor tint the front wind-
shield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunc-
tion of the system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera out of water.
• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble
the camera assembly, nor apply
any impact on the camera
assembly.
• Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the system warning sounds.
Information
We recommend that you have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer when:
• The windshield glass is replaced.
• The radar sensor or cover gets dam-
aged or replaced.
Warning message and warning
light
Forward Collision Avoidance Assist
(FCA) system disabled.
Radar blocked
When the sensor cover is blocked
with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA
system operation may stop tem-
porarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD dis-
play.
Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and
clean the radar sensor cover before
operating the FCA system.
The system will operate normally
when such dirt, snow or debris is
removed.
The FCA may not properly operate in
an area (e.g. open terrain), where
any substances are not detected
after turning ON the engine.
i
NOTICE
OOS057080L
5-69
Driving your vehicle
5
System malfunction
Check Forward Collision Avoidance
Assist system
• When the FCA is not working prop-
erly, the FCA warning light ( )
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few sec-
onds. After the message disap-
pears, the master warning light
( ) will illuminate. In this case, we
recommend that you have the vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• The FCA warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) warning light.
• The FCA is only a supplemen-
tal system for the driver's con-
venience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to con-
trol the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the FCA
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving condi-
tions, the FCA system may
activate unintentionally. This
initial warning message
appears on the LCD display
with a warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestri-
an ahead. The FCA system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
• Even if there is any problem
with the brake control function
of the FCA system, the vehi-
cle's basic braking perform-
ance will operate normally.
However, brake control func-
tion for avoiding collision will
not activate.
• If the vehicle in front stops
suddenly, you may have less
control of the brake system.
Therefore, always keep a safe
distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you.
• The FCA system may activate
during braking and the vehi-
cle may stop suddenly shift-
ing loose objects toward the
passengers. Always keep
loose objects secured.
• The FCA system may not acti-
vate if the driver applies the
brake pedal to avoid a colli-
sion.
• The brake control may be
insufficient, possibly causing
a collision, if a vehicle in front
abruptly stops. Always pay
extreme caution.
WARNING
■ Type A ■ Type B
OOS057081L/OOS057082L
5-70
Driving your vehicle
Limitations of the system
The Forward Collision avoidance
assist (FCA) system system is
designed to monitor the vehicle ahead
or a pedestrian in the roadway through
radar signals and camera recognition
to warn the driver that a collision is
imminent, and if necessary, apply
emergency braking.
In certain situations, the radar sen-
sor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-
tem may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
FCA operation may be limited.
• The FCA system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
• The FCA system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
• The FCA system does not
detect vehicles in the oppo-
site lane.
• The FCA system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
• The FCA system cannot detect
the driver approaching the
side view of a parked vehicle
(for example on a dead end
street.)
In these cases, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance,
and if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce the driv-
ing speed in order to maintain a
safe distance.
WARNING
• Occupants may get injured, if
the vehicle abruptly stops by
the activated FCA system. Pay
extreme caution.
• The FCA system operates
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
5-71
Driving your vehicle
5
Detecting vehicles
The sensor may be limited when:
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• The camera lens is contaminated
due to tinted, filmed or coated
windshield, damaged glass, or
stuck of foreign matter (sticker,
bug, etc.) on the glass
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• There is interference by electro-
magnetic waves
• There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
• The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited
• The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected (for example a motor-
cycle or a bicycle, etc.)
• The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recog-
nition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
• The driver's field of view is not well
illuminated (either too dark or too
much reflection or too much back-
light that obscures the field of view)
• The vehicle in front does not have
their rear lights properly turned ON.
• The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when enter-
ing or exiting a tunnel
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road
• The field of view in front is obstruct-
ed by sun glare
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• The vehicle in front is driving errati-
cally
• The vehicle is on unpaved or
uneven rough surfaces, or road
with sudden gradient changes.
• The vehicle is driven near areas
containing metal substances as a
construction zone, railroad, etc.
• The vehicle drives inside a building,
such as a basement parking lot
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
• The sensor recognition changes
suddenly when passing over a
speed bump
• The vehicle in front is moving verti-
cally to the driving direction
• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-
tically
• The vehicle in front is driving
towards your vehicle or reversing
• You are on roundabouts and the
vehicle in front circles
5-72
Driving your vehicle
- Driving on a curve
The performance of the FCA system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
On curved roads, the other vehicle
on the same lane is not recognized
and the FCA system's performance
may be degraded. This may result in
unnecessary alarm or braking or no
alarm or braking when necessary.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
The FCA system may recognize a
vehicle in the next lane when driving
on a curved road.
In this case, the system may unnec-
essarily alarm the driver and apply
the brake.
Always pay attention to road and
driving conditions, while driving. If
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
Also, when necessary depress the
accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-
tem from unnecessarily decelerating
your vehicle.
Check to be sure that the road con-
ditions permit safe operation of FCA.
OAE056101OAE056100
5-73
Driving your vehicle
5
- Driving on a slope
The performance of the FCA decreas-
es while driving upward or downward
on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-
cle in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the FCA suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.
- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the FCA system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, espe-
cially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly. In this case, you must main-
tain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the FCA sys-
tem may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.
OAE056103 OAE056109OOS057073
5-74
Driving your vehicle
- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, addi-
tional special attention is required.
The FCA system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if nec-
essary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.
Detecting pedestrians
The sensor may be limited when:
• The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
• The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
• The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the back-
ground, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recogni-
tion system
• The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
• It is difficult to detect and distin-
guish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd
• There is an item similar to a per-
son's body structure
• The pedestrian is small
• The pedestrian has impaired
mobility
• The sensor recognition is limited
• The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
• Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving
OOS057022
5-75
Driving your vehicle
Information
In some instances, the FCA system
may be cancelled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.
i
5
• Never try to test the operation
of the FCA system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.
• If the front bumper, front
glass, radar or camera have
been replaced or repaired, we
recommend that you have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not use the Forward
Collision avoidance Assist
(FCA) system when towing a
vehicle. Application of the
FCA system while towing may
adversely affect the safety of
your vehicle or the towing
vehicle.
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The FCA system is designed
to detect and monitor the
vehicle ahead or detect a
pedestrian in the roadway
through radar signals and
camera recognition. It is not
designed to detect bicycles,
motorcycles, or smaller
wheeled objects such as lug-
gage bags, shopping carts, or
strollers.
WARNING
5-76
Driving your vehicle
L
LAANNEE KKEEEEPPIINNGG AASSSSIISSTT ((LLKKAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) sys-
tem with a camera at the front wind-
shield, helps detect lane markers on
the road, and assists the driver's
steering to help keep the vehicle
between lanes.
When the system detects the vehicle
straying from its lane, it alerts the
driver with a visual and audible warn-
ing, while applying a slight counter-
steering torque, trying to prevent the
vehicle from moving out of its lane.
OOS057033
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices, but a conven-
ience function. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always be
aware of the surrounding and
steer the vehicle.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA) system:
• Do not steer the steering
wheel suddenly when the
steering wheel is being assist-
ed by the system.
• LKA system helps to prevent
the driver from moving out of
the lane unintentionally by
assisting the driver's steering.
However, the driver should
not solely rely on the system
but always pay attention on
the steering wheel to stay in
the lane.
WARNING
• The operation of the LKA sys-
tem can be canceled or not
work properly according to
road condition and surround-
ings. Always be cautious
when driving.
• Do not disassemble the LKA
system camera temporarily to
tint the window or attach any
types of coatings and acces-
sories. If you disassemble the
camera and assemble it again,
we recommend that you take
your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
system checked for calibra-
tion.
• When you replace the wind-
shield glass, LKA system
camera or related parts of the
steering wheel, we recom-
mend that you take your vehi-
cle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system
checked for calibration.
5-77
Driving your vehicle
5
LKA operation
To activate/deactivate the LKA sys-
tem:
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, press the LKA system but-
ton located on the instrument panel
on the left hand side of the steering
wheel. (Right hand side of the steer-
ing wheel for RHD vehicles.)
The indicator in the cluster display
will initially illuminate white. This indi-
cates the LKA system is in the
READY but NOT ENABLED state.
• The system detects lane
markers and controls the
steering wheel by a camera,
therefore, if the lane markers
are hard to detect, the system
may not work properly.
Please refer to "Limitations of
the system".
• Do not remove or damage the
related parts of LKA system.
• You may not hear a warning
sound of LKA system
because of excessive audio
sound.
• Do not place objects on the
dashboard that reflects light
such as mirrors, white paper,
etc. The system may malfunc-
tion if the sunlight is reflected.
• Always have your hands on
the steering wheel while the
LKA system is activated. If
you continue to drive with
your hands off the steering
wheel after the "Keep hands
on steering wheel" warning
message appears, the system
will turn off automatically.
• The steering wheel is not con-
tinuously controlled so if the
vehicle speed is at a higher
rate when leaving a lane the
vehicle may not be controlled
by the system. The driver
must always follow the speed
limit when using the system.
• If you attach objects to the
steering wheel, the system
may not assist steering or the
hands off alarm may not work
properly.
• When you tow a trailer, make
sure that you turn off the LKA
system.
OOS057034
5-78
Driving your vehicle
Note that the vehicle speed must be
at least approximately 60 km/h (40
mph) to ENABLE the LKA system.
The indicator in the cluster display
will illuminate green.
The color of indicator will
change depending on the
condition of LKA system.
- White : Sensor does not detect
lane markers or vehicle
speed is under 60 km/h
(40mph).
- Green : Sensor detects lane mark-
ers and the system is able
to control vehicle steering.
Information
If the indicator (white) is activated
from the previous ignition cycle, the
system will turn ON without any addi-
tional control. If you press the LKA
button again, the indicator on the
cluster goes off.
LKA activation
• To see the LKA system screen on
the LCD display in the cluster,
select ASSIST mode ( ). For
more details, refer to "LCD Display
Modes" in chapter 3.
• When both lane markers are
detected and all the conditions to
activate the LKA system are satis-
fied, a green steering wheel indica-
tor will illuminate and the LKA sys-
tem indicator light will change from
white to green. This indicates that
the LKA system is in the
ENABLED state and the steering
wheel will be able to be controlled.
i
OOS057035L
The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system is a system to prevent
the driver from leaving the lane.
However, the driver should not
solely rely on the system but
always check the road condi-
tions when driving.
WARNING
5-79
Driving your vehicle
5
• If vehicle speed is over 60 km/h (40
mph) and the system detects lane
markers, the color changes from
gray to white.
• If the system detects the left lane
marker, the left lane marker color
will change from gray to white.
• If the system detects the right lane
marker, the right lane marker color
will change from gray to white.
• Both lane markers must be detect-
ed for the system to fully activate.
• If your vehicle speed exceeds 60
km/h (40 mph) and the LKA sys-
tem button is ON, the system is
enabled. If your vehicle departs
from the projected lane in front of
you, theLKA system operates as
follows:
A visual warning appears on the
cluster LCD display. Either the left
lane marker or the right lane marker
in the cluster LCD display will blink
depending on which direction the
vehicle is veering.
If the steering wheel appears, the
system will control the vehicle's
steering to prevent the vehicle from
crossing the lane marker.
Keep hands on steering wheel
If the driver takes their hands off the
steering wheel for several seconds
while the LKA system is activated,
the system will warn the driver.
Information
If the steering wheel is held very light-
ly the message may still appear
because the LKA system may not rec-
ognize that the driver has their hands
on the wheel.
i
■ Lane marker undetected
■ Lane marker detected
OOS057035L/OOS057037L
■ Left lane marker ■ Right lane marker
OOS057038L/OOS057039L OAEE056129L
5-80
Driving your vehicle
Driver's grasp not detected.
LKA system will be disabled
temporarily
If the driver still does not have their
hands on the steering wheel after the
message "Keep hands on steering
wheel", the system will not control
the steering wheel and warn the driv-
er only when the driver crosses the
lane markers.
However, if the driver has their hands
on the steering wheel again, the sys-
tem will start controlling the steering
wheel.
Information
• Even though the steering is assisted
by the system, the driver may con-
trol the steering wheel.
• The steering wheel may feel heavier
when the steering wheel is assisted
by the system than when it is not.
i
The warning message may
appear late according to road
conditions. Therefore, always
have your hands on the steering
wheel while driving.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for
accurate steering.
• Turn off the system and drive
the vehicle in below situa-
tions.
- In bad weather
- In bad road condition
- When the steering wheel
needs to be controlled by the
driver frequently.
WARNING
OOS057083L
5-81
Driving your vehicle
5
Warning light and message
Check LKA system
If there is a problem with the system
a message will appear for a few sec-
onds. If the problem continues the
LKA system failure indicator will illu-
minate.
LKA system failure indicator
The LKA system failure
indicator (yellow) will illu-
minate if the LKA system
is not working properly.
We recommend that the
system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
When there is a problem with the
system do one of the following:
• Turn the system on after turning
the engine off and on again.
• Check if the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check if the system is affected by
the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,
etc.)
• Check if there is foreign matter on
the camera lens.
If the problem is not solved, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
The LKA system will not be in the
ENABLED state and the steering
wheel will not be assisted when:
• The turn signal is turned on before
changing a lane. If you change
lanes without the turn signal on,
the steering wheel might be con-
trolled.
• The vehicle is not driven in the mid-
dle of the lane when the system is
turned on or right after changing a
lane.
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) or
VSM (Vehicle Stability Management)
is activated.
• The vehicle is driven on a sharp
curve.
• Vehicle speed is below 60 km/h (37
mph) and over 180 km/h (112 mph).
• The vehicle makes sharp lane
changes.
• The vehicle brakes suddenly.
• Only one lane marker is detected.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• There are more than two lane
markers on the road. (e.g. con-
struction area)
OOS057084R
5-82
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle is driven on a steep
incline.
• The steering wheel is turned sud-
denly.
Limitations of the System
The LKA system may operate pre-
maturely even if the vehicle does not
depart from the intended lane, OR,
the LKA system may not assist your
steering or warn you if the vehicle
leaves the intended lane under the
following circumstances:
When the lane and road condi-
tions are poor
• It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marking from the road surface or
the lane marking is faded or not
clearly marked.
• It is difficult to distinguish the color
of the lane marker from the road.
• There are markings on the road
surface that look like a lane marker
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• The lane marker is merged or
divided. (e.g. tollgate)
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane marker are
crossing complicatedly.
• There are more than two lane
markers on the road in front of you.
• The lane marker is very thick or
thin.
• The lanes ahead are not visible
due to rain, snow, water on the
road, damaged or stained road
surface, or other factors.
• The shadow is on the lane marker
by a median strip, trees, etc.
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone.
• There are crosswalk signs or other
symbols on the road.
• The lane marker in a tunnel is
stained with oil, etc.
• The lane suddenly disappears
such as at the intersection.
When external condition is inter-
vened
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or
exiting a tunnel, or when passing
under a bridge.
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel.
• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier, guardrail and reflector post
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera.
• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road.
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare.
• There is not enough distance
between you and the vehicle in
front to be able to detect the lane
marker or the vehicle ahead is driv-
ing on the lane marker.
5-83
Driving your vehicle
5
• Driving on a steep grade, over a
hill, or when driving on a curved
road.
• The adverse road conditions cause
excessive vehicle vibrations while
driving.
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to direct sunlight, etc.
When front visibility is poor
• The windshield or the LKAS cam-
era lens is blocked with dirt or
debris.
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstruct-
ed.
• Placing objects on the dashboard,
etc.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or snow.
LKA system function change
The driver can change LKA to Lane
Departure Warning (LDW) system or
change the LKA system mode
between Standard LKA and Active
LKA from the LCD display. Go to the
"User Settings → Driver Assistance
→ Lane Keeping Assist → Lane
Departure Warning/Standard
LKA/Active LKA".
The system is automatically set to
Standard LKA if a function is not
selected.
Lane Departure Warning
LDW system alerts the driver with a
visual warning and a warning alarm
when the system detects the vehicle
departing the lane. The steering
wheel will not be controlled.
Standard LKA
The Standard LKA mode guides the
driver to help keep the vehicle within
the lanes. It rarely controls the steer-
ing wheel, when the vehicle drives
well inside the lanes. However, it
starts to control the steering wheel,
when the vehicle is about to deviate
out of the lanes.
Active LKA
The Active LKA mode provides more
frequent steering wheel control in
comparison with the Standard LKA
mode. Active LKA can reduce the dri-
ver’s fatigue to assist the steering for
maintaining the vehicle in the middle
of the lane.
5-84
Driving your vehicle
The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system displays the condition of the
driver's fatigue level and inattentive
driving practices.
System setting and activation
System setting
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system is set to be in the
OFF position, when your vehicle is
first delivered to you from the fac-
tory.
• To turn ON the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system, turn on
the engine, and then select "User
Settings → Driver Assistance →
Driver Attention Warning → High
Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity" on
the LCD display.
• The driver can select the Driver
Attention Warning (DAW) system
mode.
- Off : The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system is deactivated.
- Normal Sensitivity : The Driver
Attention Warning (DAW) system
alerts the driver of his/her fatigue
level or inattentive driving prac-
tices.
- High Sensitivity : The Driver
Attention Warning (DAW) system
alerts the driver of his/her fatigue
level or inattentive driving prac-
tices faster than Normal mode.
• The set-up of the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system will be
maintained, as selected, when the
engine is re-started.
Display of the driver's attention
level
DDRRIIVVEERR AATTTTEENNTTIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((DDAAWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS057085L
■ System off
OPDE056061
■ Attentive driving
5-85
Driving your vehicle
5
• The driver can monitor their driving
conditions on the LCD display.
The DAW screen will appear when
you select the ASSIST mode tab
( ) on the LCD display if the sys-
tem is activated. (For more
details, refer to "LCD Display
Modes" in chapter 3.)
• The driver's attention level is dis-
played on the scale of 1 to 5. The
lower the level is, the more inatten-
tive the driver is.
• The level decreases when the driv-
er does not take a break for a cer-
tain period of time.
• The level increases when the driv-
er attentively drives for a certain
period of time.
• When the driver turns on the sys-
tem while driving, it displays 'Last
Break time' and level.
Take a break
• The "Consider taking a break"
message appears on the LCD dis-
play and a warning sounds in order
to suggest the driver to take a
break, when the driver’s attention
level is below 1.
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system does not suggest
the driver to take a break, when the
total driving time is shorter than 10
minutes.
Resetting the system
• The last break time is set to 00:00
and the driver's attention level is
set to 5 (very attentive) when the
driver resets the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system.
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system resets the last
break time to 00:00 and the driver's
attention level to 5 in the following
situations.
- The engine is turned OFF.
- The driver unfastens the seat belt
and then opens the driver's door.
- The vehicle is stopped for more
than 10 minutes.
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system operates again,
when the driver restarts driving.
OPDE056063
OPDE056062
■ Inattentive driving
5-86
Driving your vehicle
System standby
The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)
system enters the ready status and
displays the 'Standby' screen in the
following situations.
- The camera does not detect the
lanes.
- Driving speed remains under 60
km/h (40 mph) or over 200 km/h
(125 mph).
System malfunction
Check Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system
When the "Check Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system" warning
message appears, the system is not
working properly. In this case, we rec-
ommend that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OOS057086L OOS057087L
• The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system is not a substi-
tute for safe driving practices,
but a convenience function
only. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive cau-
tiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• The system may suggest a
break according to the dri-
ver's driving pattern or habits
even if the driver doesn't feel
fatigue.
• The driver, who feels fatigued,
should take a break, even
though there is no break sug-
gestion by the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system.
WARNING
5-87
Driving your vehicle
5
The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system utilizes the camera
sensor on the front windshield for
its operation. To keep the camera
sensor in the best condition, you
should observe the followings:
• NEVER install any accessories
or stickers on the front wind-
shield, nor tint the front wind-
shield.
• NEVER locate any reflective
objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)
over the dashboard. Any light
reflection may cause a malfunc-
tion of the Driver Attention
Warning (DAW) system.
• Pay extreme caution to keep the
camera sensor out of water.
• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble
the camera assembly, nor apply
any impact on the camera
assembly.
• Do not disassemble camera
temporarily for tinted window or
attaching any types of coatings
and accessories. If you disas-
semble a camera and assemble
it again, we recommend that you
take your vehicle to an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer and have
the system checked for calibra-
tion.
NOTICE
The Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system may not properly
operate with limited alerting in
the following situations:
• The lane detection perform-
ance is limited. (For more
details, refer to "Lane Keeping
Assist (LKA) system" in this
chapter.)
• The vehicle is violently driven
or is abruptly turned for
obstacle avoidance (e.g. con-
struction area, other vehicles,
fallen objects, bumpy road).
CAUTION
• Forward drivability of the
vehicle is severely under-
mined (possibly due to wide
variation in tire pressures,
uneven tire wear-out, toe-
in/toe-out alignment).
• The vehicle drives on a curvy
road.
• The vehicle drives through a
windy area.
• The vehicle drives on a
bumpy road.
• The vehicle is controlled by
the following driving assist
systems:
- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)
system
- Forward Collision-avoidance
Assist (FCA) system
Playing the vehicle audio sys-
tem at high volume may offset
the Driver Attention Warning
(DAW) system warning sounds.
CAUTION
5-88
Driving your vehicle
Speed Limit Control operation
You can set the speed limit when you
do not want to drive over a specific
speed.
If you drive over the preset speed
limit, the warning system operates
(set speed limit will blink and chime
will sound) until the vehicle speed
returns within the speed limit.
Information
While speed limit control is in opera-
tion, the cruise control system cannot
be activated.
Speed limit control switch
: Changes mode between
cruise control system and
speed limit control system.
RES+: Resumes or increases speed
limit control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit
control speed.
O (Cancel): Cancels set speed limit.
To set speed limit
1. Press the button to turn
the system on. The speed limit
indicator in the instrument cluster
will illuminate.
i
SSPPEEEEDD LLIIMMIITT CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OPDE056114 OOS057053
System off Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
5-89
Driving your vehicle
5
2. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-).
3. • Push the toggle switch up
(RES+) or down (SET-), and
release it at the desired speed.
• Push the toggle switch up
(RES+) or down (SET-) and hold
it. The speed will increase or
decrease by 5 km/h.
The set speed limit will display on the
instrument cluster.
If you would like to drive over the pre-
set speed limit when you depress the
accelerator pedal less than approxi-
mately 50%, the vehicle speed will
maintain within speed limit.
However if you depress the acceler-
ator pedal more than approximately
70%, you can drive over the speed
limit. Then the set speed limit will
blink and chime will sound until you
return the vehicle speed within the
speed limit.
To turn off the speed limit con-
trol, do one of the following:
• Press the button.
• If you press O (cancel) button
once, the set speed limit will can-
cel, but it will not turn the system
off. If you wish to resume the speed
limit, push the +RES or SET- tog-
gle switch on your steering wheel
to your desired speed.
OOS057054
OOS057055
OOS057053
5-90
Driving your vehicle
Cruise Control operation
1. CRUISE ( ) indicator
2. SET indicator
The Cruise Control system allows you
to drive at speeds above 30 km/h
(20 mph) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transmission vehicle, do
not shift into neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal, since
the engine will be overrevved. If
this happens, depress the clutch
pedal or press the cruise control
ON / OFF button.
NOTICE
CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Take the following precautions:
• Always set the vehicle speed
under the speed limit in your
country.
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
(CRUISE ( ) indicator light
in the instrument cluster is
illuminated) the Cruise
Control can be activated unin-
tentionally. Keep the Cruise
Control system off (CRUISE
indicator light OFF) when the
Cruise Control is not in use, to
avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas
• Do not use cruise control
when towing a trailer.
WARNING
OOS057052
5-91
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activat-
ed or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will acti-
vate after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is oper-
ating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the vehicle.
Cruise control switch
O (Cancel): Cancels cruise control
operation.
CRUISE ( , ):
Turns cruise control system on or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
Information
First, switch the mode to Cruise
Control by pressing the but-
ton if equipped with the Speed Limit
Control System.
The mode changes, as below, whenev-
er the button is pressed.
ii
OOS057053
System off Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
OOS057053
5-92
Driving your vehicle
To set Cruise Control speed
1. Press the (CRUISE) button on
the steering wheel to turn the sys-
tem on. The (CRUISE) indica-
tor will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
Information
- Manual trans-
mission
For manual transmission vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
3. Push the toggle switch down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.
Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.
To increase Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)
and hold it, while monitoring the
SET speed on the instrument clus-
ter.
Release the toggle switch when
the desired speed is shown and
the vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
i
i
OOS057053
OOS057054
OOS057055
5-93
Driving your vehicle
5
• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase 2.0
km/h (1.2 mph) each time the tog-
gle switch is operated in this man-
ner.
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch down (SET-).
To decrease Cruise Control
speed
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)
and hold it.Your vehicle will gradual-
ly slow down. Release the toggle
switch at the speed you want to
maintain.
• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease 2.0
km/h (1.2 mph) each time the toggle
switch is operated in this manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch
down (SET-).
To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.
OOS057054
5-94
Driving your vehicle
Cruise Control will be canceled
when:
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Depressing the clutch pedal.
(for manual transmission vehicle)
• Pressing the O (Cancel) button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the (CRUISE) button.
Both the (CRUISE) indicator
and the SET indicator will turn OFF.
• Pressing the button. Both
the (CRUISE) indicator and the
SET indicator will turn OFF. (if
equipped with the Speed Limit
Control)
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral). (for dual clutch transmis-
sion vehicle)
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 30 km/h
(20 mph).
• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear in
manual shift mode. (for dual clutch
transmission vehicle)
Information
Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but only pressing the
(CRUISE) button will turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
Cruise Control operation, push the
toggle switch up (RES+) located on
your steering wheel. You will return to
your previously preset speed, unless
the system was turned off using the
(CRUISE) button.
To resume preset Cruising
speed
Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If
the vehicle speed is over 30 km/h (20
mph), the vehicle will resume the
preset speed.
i
OOS057055OOS057056
5-95
Driving your vehicle
5
To turn Cruise Control off
• Press the (CRUISE) button (the
(CRUISE) indicator light will go
off).
• Press the button (The
cruise indicator light will go off.). (if
equipped with Speed Limit Control)
- With the Cruise Control on,
pressing the button once will turn
Off the Cruise Control and turn
on the Speed Limit Control.
- With the Cruise Control off and
Speed Limit Control on, pressing
the button will turn off both sys-
tem.
Information
The mode changes, as below, whenev-
er the button is pressed.
i
System off Cruise Control
Speed Limit Control
OOS057053
5-96
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
following precautions:
• Drive cautiously and maintain a
longer braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use the second
gear. Accelerate slowly to avoid
unnecessary wheel spinning.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional trac-
tion while being stuck in ice, snow,
or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a for-
ward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelera-
tor pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS
Downshifting with an a dual
clutch transmission while driv-
ing on slippery surfaces can
cause an accident. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. Be care-
ful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous -
you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehi-
cle, the vehicle can overheat
quickly, possibly causing an
engine compartment fire or
other damage. Try to avoid spin-
ning the wheels as much as
possible to prevent overheating
of either the tires or the engine.
DO NOT allow the vehicle to
spin the wheels above 56 km/h
(35 mph).
WARNING
5-97
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
The ESC system (if equipped) must be
turned OFF before rocking the vehi-
cle.
If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, pos-
sible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Driving at night
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other drivers' head-
lamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra follow-
ing distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increas-
es the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if
equipped)
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
NOTICE
i
5-98
Driving your vehicle
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driv-
ing until normal braking operation
returns.
Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increas-
es as the depth of tire tread
decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in
chapter 7.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
fail the braking operation.
Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as speci-
fied on your tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the high-
way consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
i
5-99
Driving your vehicle
5
Reducing the risk of a rollover
Your multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. The specific design
characteristics give them a higher
center of gravity than ordinary vehi-
cles making them more likely to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehi-
cles. Due to this risk, driver and pas-
sengers are strongly recommended
to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is signifi-
cantly more likely to die than a per-
son wearing a seat belt.
There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof,
and never modify your vehicle in any
way.
Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To pre-
vent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passen-
ger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers.
• Do not modify your vehicle in
any way that you would raise
the center of gravity.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on
the roof.
WARNING
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. Make sure all
passengers are wearing their
seat belts.
WARNING
5-100
Driving your vehicle
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:
Information
Information for Snow Tires and Tire
Chains in the national language
(Bulgarian, Hungarian, Icelandic,
Polish) is provided in the Appendix.
Snow or icy conditions
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Information
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local and municipal regula-
tions for possible restrictions against
their use.
i
i
WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
WARNING
5-101
Driving your vehicle
5
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instruc-
tions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
Information
• Install tire chains on the front tires.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tires will provide a
greater driving force, but will not
prevent side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local and municipal
regulations for possible restrictions
against their use.
Chain Installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chas-
sis, stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
i
OOS057008
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling:
• Drive less than 30 km/h (20
mph) or the chain manufactur-
er’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
WARNING
5-102
Driving your vehicle
When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE “S” class or wire chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retight-
en the chains after driving 0.5~1.0
km (0.3~0.6 miles).
• Do not use tire chains on vehi-
cles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 12 mm
(0.47 in) wide to prevent damage
to the chain’s connection.
Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter temperatures affect battery
performance. Inspect the battery
and cables, as specified in the
chapter 7. The battery charging level
can be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or in a service sta-
tion.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some regions during winter, it is
recommended to use the "winter
weight" oil with lower viscosity. For
further information, refer to the chap-
ter 8. When you are not sure about a
type of winter weight oil, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect the spark plugs, as speci-
fied in the chapter 7. If necessary,
replace them. Also check all ignition
wirings and components for any
cracks, wear-out, and damage.
To prevent locks from freezing
To prevent the locks from being
frozen, spray approved de-icing fluid
or glycerin into key holes. When a
lock opening is already covered with
ice, spray approved de-icing fluid
over the ice to remove it. When an
internal part of a lock freezes, try to
thaw it with a heated key. Carefully
use the heated key to avoid an injury.
NOTICE
5-103
Driving your vehicle
5
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze solution in system
To prevent the window washer from
being frozen, add authorized window
washer anti-freeze solution, as spec-
ified on the window washer contain-
er. Window washer anti-freeze solu-
tion is available from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, and most vehicle
accessory outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
solution, to prevent any damage to
the vehicle paint.
Do not let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
When there is the risk that your park-
ing brake may freeze, temporarily
apply it with the shift lever in P
(Park). Also, block the rear wheels in
advance, so the vehicle may not roll.
Then, release the parking brake.
Do not let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in such conditions during the
severe winter, you should check
underneath the vehicle on a regular
basis, to ensure that the front wheels
and the steering components is
unblocked.
Carry emergency equipment
In accordance with weather condi-
tions, you should carry appropriate
emergency equipment, while driving.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables,
window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Do not place objects or materials
in the engine compartment
Putting objects or materials in the
engine compartment may cause an
engine failure or combustion, because
they may block the engine cooling.
Such damage will not be covered by
the manufacturer’s warranty.
5-104
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering to tow with
your vehicle, you should first your
country's legal requirements. As laws
vary the requirements for towing trail-
ers, cars, or other types of vehicles
or apparatus may differ. Ask an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for fur-
ther details before towing.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly. Damage to your vehi-
cle caused by improper trailer towing
is not covered by your vehicle manu-
facturer’s warranty.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG ((FFOORR EEUURROOPPEE))
Take the following precautions:
• If you don't use the correct
equipment and/or drive improp-
erly, you can lose control of the
vehicle when you are pulling a
trailer. For example, if the trailer
is too heavy, the braking per-
formance may be reduced. You
and your passengers could be
seriously or fatally injured. Pull
a trailer only if you have fol-
lowed all the steps in this sec-
tion.
• Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW
(Gross Combination Weight),
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight),
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) and
trailer tongue load are all with-
in the limits.
• When you tow a trailer, make
sure to turn off the ISG sys-
tem.
WARNING
5-105
Driving your vehicle
5
Information
- For Europe
• The technically permissible maxi-
mum load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 %
and the technically permissible
maximum laden mass of the vehicle
may be exceeded by not more than
10% or 100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichev-
er value is lower. In this case, do not
exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) for
vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h
(49.7 mph) for vehicle of category
N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is
towing a trailer, the additional load
imposed at the trailer coupling
device may cause the tire maximum
load ratings to be exceeded, but not
by more than 15%. In this case, do
not exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and
increase the tire inflation pressure
by at least 0.2 bar.
If you decide to pull a trailer?
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a trailer hitch dealer about
sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 2,000 km
(1,200 miles) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transmission
damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for further information on
additional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)) or posted towing speed
limit.
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• Carefully observe the weight and
load limits provided in the following
pages.
i
5-106
Driving your vehicle
Trailer weight
What is the maximum safe weight of a
trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy. It depends on how you plan
to use your trailer. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how often your vehi-
cle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. The ideal trailer weight can
also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Tongue load
The tongue load is an important
weight to measure because it affects
the total Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer
tongue should weigh a maximum of
10% of the total loaded trailer weight,
within the limits of the maximum trail-
er tongue load permissible.
After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by mov-
ing some items around in the trailer.
Information
With increasing altitude the engine
performance decreases. From 1,000 m
above sea level and for every 1,000 m
thereafter 10% of vehicle/trailer
weight (trailer weighter + gross vehi-
cle weight) must be deducted.
i
Take the following precautions:
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
WARNING
OLMB053048
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
OLMB053047
Tongue Load
Total Trailer Weight
5-107
Driving your vehicle
5
M/T : Manual transmission
DCT : Dual clutch transmission
Item
Gasoline Engine
1.0 T-GDI 1.6 T-GDI
M/T
DCT
Maximum trailer weight
kg (Ibs.)
With brake system
1200 (2645) 1250 (2756)
Without brake system
600 (1322)
Maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
80 (176)
Recommended distance from rear wheel center to coupling point
mm (inch)
820 (32.3)
Reference weight and distance when towing a trailer (for Europe)
5-108
Driving your vehicle
Trailer towing equipment
Hitches
Information
The mounting hole for hitches are
located on both sides of the underbody
behind the rear tires.
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you
don’t seal them, carbon monoxide
(CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle, as well as dirt
and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory is
available at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer's recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave
just enough slack so you can turn
with your trailer. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms to
your country's regulations and that it
is properly installed and operating
correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes loaded, then it needs its
own brakes and they must be ade-
quate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you'll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. Be sure not
to modify your vehicle's brake sys-
tem.
i
OOS067031L
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system. This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent trail-
er shop for this work.
WARNING
5-109
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not nearly as responsive
as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and brakes.
During your trip, occasionally check
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and trailer brakes
are still working.
Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You will need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move your hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, if possi-
ble, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do this
so your trailer won’t strike soft shoul-
ders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn signals
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you dis-
connect and then reconnect the
wires.
5-110
Driving your vehicle
Driving on hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don't shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
overheated and may not operate effi-
ciently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transmission
overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes and you have dual clutch
transmission, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build-up and extend the life of
your transmission.
To prevent engine and/or trans-
mission overheating:
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat. If the needle of the
coolant temperature gauge
moves towards "H" (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is
safe to do so, and allow the
engine to idle until it cools
down.You may proceed once the
engine has cooled sufficiently.
• If you tow a trailer with the max-
imum gross vehicle weight and
maximum trailer weight, it can
cause the engine or transmis-
sion to overheat. When driving
in such conditions, allow the
engine to idle until it cools
down.You may proceed once the
engine or transmission has
cooled sufficiently.
• When towing a trailer, your vehi-
cle speed may be much slower
than the general flow of traffic,
especially when climbing an
uphill grade. Use the right hand
lane when towing a trailer on an
uphill grade. Choose your vehi-
cle speed according to the max-
imum posted speed limit for
vehicles with trailers, the steep-
ness of the grade, and your trail-
er weight.
• Vehicles equipped with a dual
clutch transmission when tow-
ing a trailer on steep grades,
need to be aware that the clutch
in the transmission could over-
heat.
NOTICE
Do not connect a trailer lighting
system directly to your vehi-
cle's lighting system. Use an
approved trailer wiring harness.
Failure to do so could result in
damage to the vehicle electrical
system and/or personal injury.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for assistance.
WARNING
5-111
Driving your vehicle
5
When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode
engages. If the safe protection
mode engages, the gear posi-
tion indicator on the cluster
blinks with a chime sound.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and driving may not be smooth.
If you ignore this warning, the
driving condition may become
worse.
To return to normal driving con-
ditions, stop the vehicle on a flat
road and apply the foot brake for
a few minutes before driving off.
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
space.
Turn the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb (right if head-
ed down hill, left if headed up hill).
2. Shift the vehicle to P (Park, for
dual clutch transmission vehicle)
or neutral (for manual transmis-
sion vehicle).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4. Place wheel chocks under the
trailer wheels on the down hill side
of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the park-
ing brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes and parking
brakes.
7. Move the shift lever to P (Park, for
dual clutch transmission vehicle)
or 1st gear (for manual transmis-
sion vehicle) when the vehicle is
parked on a uphill grade and in R
(Reverse) on a downhill.
8. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
To prevent serious or fatal
injury:
• Do not get out of the vehicle
without the parking brake
firmly set. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You and
others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal to hold the vehicle on
an uphill.
WARNING
5-112
Driving your vehicle
Ready to leave after parking on
a hill
1. With the shift lever in P (Park, for
dual clutch transmission vehicle)
or neutral (for manual transmis-
sion vehicle), apply your brakes
and hold the brake pedal down
while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when towing a
trailer
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, dual
clutch transmission fluid, axle lubri-
cant and cooling system fluid. Brake
condition is another important item to
frequently check. If you're trailering,
it's a good idea to review these items
before you start your trip. Don't forget
to also maintain your trailer and
hitch. Follow the maintenance sched-
ule that accompanied your trailer and
check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each
day's driving. Most importantly, all
hitch nuts and bolts should be tight.
To prevent vehicle damage:
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
on hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indi-
cates over-heating, switch off
the air conditioner and stop the
vehicle in a safe area to cool
down the engine.
• Do not switch off the engine
while the coolant gauge indi-
cates over-heating.
(Keep the engine idle to cool
down the engine)
• When towing check dual clutch
transmission fluid more fre-
quently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with an air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan
to improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
NOTICE
5-113
Driving your vehicle
5
Two labels on your driver's door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiar-
ize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle's weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-
tions and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle includ-
ing a full tank of fuel and all standard
equipment. It does not include pas-
sengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver's door sill.
Overloading
VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWEEIIGGHHTT
The Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the Certification
Label attached to the driver's
(or front passenger's) door.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weighing
the items (and people) before
putting them in the vehicle. Be
careful not to overload your
vehicle.
WARNING
What to do in an emergency
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-3
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-3
If the engine stalls while driving...................................6-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing .........6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving..............................6-4
If the engine will not start ...................................6-4
If the engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly...............................................................6-4
If the engine turns over normally but
doesn't start .......................................................................6-5
Jump starting ..........................................................6-5
If the engine overheats ........................................6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(Type A)...................................................................6-9
Low tire pressure telltale..............................................6-10
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator .....................................................6-11
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(Type B).................................................................6-14
Check tire pressure ........................................................6-14
Tire pressure monitoring system................................6-15
Low tire pressure telltale..............................................6-16
Low tire pressure position telltale and
tire pressure telltale .......................................................6-16
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator .....................................................6-17
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-18
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire)............6-20
Jack and tools ..................................................................6-20
Changing tires ..................................................................6-21
Jack label...........................................................................6-26
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack......................6-27
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit)
- Type A ................................................................6-28
Introduction ......................................................................6-28
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit.......6-29
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit .........................6-30
Using the Tire Mobility Kit............................................6-31
Checking the tire inflation pressure ..........................6-33
6
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit)
- Type B ................................................................6-35
Introduction ......................................................................6-35
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit.......6-36
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit .........................6-37
Using the Tire Mobility Kit............................................6-38
Distributing the sealant .................................................6-39
Checking the tire inflation pressure ..........................6-40
Towing ...................................................................6-41
Towing service .................................................................6-41
Removable towing hook ................................................6-42
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-43
Emergency commodity........................................6-45
Fire extinguisher .............................................................6-45
First aid kit........................................................................6-45
Triangle reflector ............................................................6-45
Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-45
6
6-3
What to do in an emergency
6
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when approach-
ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi-
cle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button with the ignition switch
in any position. The button is located
in the center fascia panel. All turn
signal lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
If the engine stalls while driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flash-
er.
• Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroads or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY
W
WHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG
OOS067001
6-4
What to do in an emergency
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P (Park,
for dual clutch transmission vehicle)
or neutral (for manual transmission
vehicle), apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) if it is dual
clutch transmission vehicle. The
engine starts only when the shift
lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. This could cause damage to your
vehicle. See instructions for "Jump
Starting" provided in this chapter.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT
S
STTAARRTT
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
CAUTION
6-5
What to do in an emergency
6
If the engine turns over nor-
mally but doesn't start
• Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
JJUUMMPP SSTTAARRTTIINNGG
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
WARNING
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
6-6
What to do in an emergency
To prevent damage to your vehi-
cle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.
Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for
dual clutch transmission vehicle)
or neutral (for manual transmis-
sion vehicle), and set the parking
brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.
i
NOTICE
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
Pb
6-7
What to do in an emergency
6
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).
7. Connect the other end of the sec-
ond jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approxi-
mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-
utes. Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, neg-
ative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
1VQA4001
6-8
What to do in an emergency
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be over-
heating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park, for
dual clutch transmission vehicle)
or neutral (for manual transmis-
sion/dual clutch transmission vehi-
cle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is ON, turn it
OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating. If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehi-
cle. (If the air conditioning had been
in use, it is normal for cold water to
be draining from it when you stop.)
5. If engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we rec-
ommend that you call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the mov-
ing parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
NEVER remove the
radiator cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when remov-
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclock-
wise to remove it.
WARNING
6-9
What to do in an emergency
6
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
• Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates a leak in the cooling
system and we recommend
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
CAUTION
TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
(
(TTYYPPEE AA))
OOS067005
6-10
What to do in an emergency
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intend-
ed. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
If the TPMS indicator does not illu-
minate for 3 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position or engine is running, or if
it comes on after blinking for
approximately one minute, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Low tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure
monitoring system warn-
ing indicator is illuminated
and warning message
displayed on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle's
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver's side center
pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach
a service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
10 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
NOTICE
6-11
What to do in an emergency
6
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under
inflation warning at the same time as
system failure then it will illuminate
the TPMS malfunction indicator.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a propor-
tional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around
electric power supply cables
or radios transmitter such as
at police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may illuminate if snow
chains or some separately
purchased devices such as
notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navi-
gation etc. are used in the
vehicle.This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
CAUTION
6-12
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure will come on. We recom-
mend that the flat tire be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale will blink or remain
on until the low pressure tire is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale may blink or illumi-
nate after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or we
recommend that the TPMS sensor
mounted on the replaced spare
wheel be initiated by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, the TPMS mal-
function indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, We rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elem-
inated when you replace the tire
with a new one.
CAUTION
If original mounted tire is
replaced with the spare tire, the
TPMS sensor on the replaced
spare wheel should be initiated
and we recommend that the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel be deactivated
by a HYUNDAI dealer.
If the TPMS sensor on the origi-
nal mounted wheel located in
the spare tire carrier still acti-
vates, the tire pressure monitor-
ing system may not operate
properly. We recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
6-13
What to do in an emergency
6
TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING
For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
❈
❈
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov.
1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle
registrations)
WARNING
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by HYUNDAI if
your vehicle is equipped with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
CAUTION
6-14
What to do in an emergency
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
and tire pressure telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the Assist mode on the cluster.
Refer to the "LCD Display
Modes" in chapter 3.
• Tire pressure is displayed after a
few minutes of driving after initial
engine start up.
• If tire pressure is not displayed when
the vehicle is stopped, "Drive to dis-
play" message will appear. After driv-
ing, check the tire pressure.
• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings mode on
the instrument cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to "LCD
Modes" in chapter 3).
TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS)) ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD)) ((TTYYPPEE BB))
OOS067005
OOS047115L
OOS047119L
6-15
What to do in an emergency
6
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
WARNING
6-16
What to do in an emergency
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
1. The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator
does not illuminate for 3 sec-
onds when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or
the engine is running.
2. The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure
position telltale
and tire pressure
telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and a warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The low tire
pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver's side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with a
spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replacing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, the below will
happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated because the TPMS sensor is
not mounted on the spare wheel.
NOTICE
OOS047115L
6-17
What to do in an emergency
6
The spare tire is not equipped with
a tire pressure sensor.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the low tire pressure posi-
tion telltale will not be displayed
even though the vehicle has an
under-inflated tire.
NOTICE
NOTICE
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a lowering
of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is higher or lower, you should
check the tire inflation pressure
and adjust the tires to the rec-
ommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-18
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replacing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, the below will
happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated because the TPMS sensor is
not mounted on the spare wheel.
You may not be able identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure the tire's
inflation pressure. Please note that a
tire that is hot (from being driven) will
have a higher pressure measure-
ment than a tire that is cold (from sit-
ting stationary for at least 3 hour and
driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) dur-
ing that 3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
the vehicle is moving around
electric power supply cables
or radios transmitter such as
at police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
•
The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly
1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or
some separate electronic
devices such as notebook
computer, mobile charger,
remote starter or navigation
etc., are used in the vehicle.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire
pressure sensor.
CAUTION
6-19
What to do in an emergency
6
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external factors
such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING
For EUROPE
• Do not modify the vehicle; it
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recom-
mend that you use parts for
replacement from an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI deal-
er. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work prop-
erly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
❈❈
All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2012 ~
- Current model vehicle :
Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on
vehicle registrations)
WARNING
6-20
What to do in an emergency
Jack and tools
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same com-
partment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from "rattling", store them in their
proper location.
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE ((WWIITTHH SSPPAARREE TTIIRREE,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS067035L
OOS067036L
Changing a tire can be danger-
ous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.
CAUTION
6-21
What to do in an emergency
6
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-
down wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the wheel nut
wrench.
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench.
Changing tires
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle's tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park,
for dual clutch transmission vehi-
cle) or neutral (for manual trans-
mission vehicle), apply the park-
ing brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety pre-
cautions:
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a
level, firm place off the road,
call a towing service for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the jack pro-
vided with the vehicle.
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking sup-
port.
WARNING
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
OOS067040
6-22
What to do in an emergency
[A] : Block
5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
7. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are chang-
ing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches. Never jack at any
other position or part of the vehi-
cle. It may damage the side seal
molding.
OOS067016L OOS067017 OOS067018
■ Front ■ Rear
6-23
What to do in an emergency
6
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from
the studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-
gers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts clos-
est to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle coun-
terclockwise.
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, we recommend
that an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer tighten the lug nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possi-
ble. The wheel lug nut should
be tightened to 11~13 kgf·m
(79~94 lbf·ft).
OOS067020 OOS067019L
6-24
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see "Tires and
Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure
instructions.). If the pressure is lower
or higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, put the flat tire in its place and
return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
• Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a
spare tire. Adjust it to the rec-
ommended pressure.
• Check and tighten the wheel lug
nuts after driving over 50 km if
tires are replaced. Re-check the
tire wheel lug nuts after driving
over 1,000 km.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-
ment is damaged or in poor condi-
tion, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
Use of compact spare tires
(if equipped)
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
NOTICE
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub. We
recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
CAUTION
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control pos-
sibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the com-
pact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid fail-
ure of the compact spare tire.
WARNING
6-25
What to do in an emergency
6
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire's tread life is
shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
your compact spare tire regularly
and replace worn compact spare
tires with the same size and design,
mounted on the same wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 11~13 kgf·m
(79~94 lbf·ft).
NOTICE
To prevent damaging the com-
pact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diame-
ter is smaller than the diame-
ter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 25 mm (1 inch).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the com-
pact spare wheel.
CAUTION
6-26
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
OOS067043
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with dual clutch transmis-
sion.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6-27
What to do in an emergency
6
JACKDOC14S
EC Declaration of conformity for Jack
6-28
What to do in an emergency
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (distance up to 200
km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of
80 km/h (50 mph) in order to reach a
service station or tire dealer to have
the tire replaced.
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only. This instruction shows
you step by step how to temporarily
seal the puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE ((WWIITTHH TTIIRREE MMOOBBIILLIITTYY KKIITT,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD)) -- TTYYPPEE AA
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.
WARNING
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
OOS067030
6-29
What to do in an emergency
6
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the tire mobil-
ity kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-
cles or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
If the tire cannot be made roadwor-
thy with the Tire Mobility Kit, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
tire is severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below
-30°C (-22°F).
• In case of skin contact with the
sealant, wash the area thoroughly
with plenty of water. If the irritation
persists, seek medical attention.
• In case of eye contact with the
sealant, flush your eyes for at least
15 minutes. If the irritation persists,
seek medical attention.
• In case of swallowing the sealant,
rinse the mouth and drink plenty of
water. However, never give any-
thing to an unconscious person
and seek medical attention imme-
diately.
• Long time exposure to the sealant
may cause damage to bodily tissue
such as kidney, etc.
Do not use the TMK if a tire is
severely damaged by driving
run flat or with insufficient air
pressure.
Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the
tire can be sealed using the
TMK.
WARNING
6-30
What to do in an emergency
0. Speed- restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. ON/OFF switch
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape
under high pressure.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OEL069020
Expired sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
6-31
What to do in an emergency
6
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
2. Screw the connection hose (9)
onto the connector of the sealant
bottle.
3. Ensure that the button (8) on the
compressor is not pressed.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw the filling hose (2) of the
sealant bottle onto the valve.
Detach the speed restriction
label (0) from the sealant bottle
(1), and place it in a highly visi-
ble place inside the vehicle
such as on the steering wheel
to remind the driver not to drive
too fast.
CAUTION
OLMF064104
OOS067010
OOS067011R
6-32
What to do in an emergency
5. Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor (4) so
that the bottle is upright.
6. Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7. Plug the compressor power cord
(3) into the vehicle power outlet.
Only use the front passenger side
power outlet when connecting the
power cord.
8. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
NOTICE
OLMF064105
Securely install the sealant fill-
ing hose to the valve. If not,
sealant may flow backward,
possibly clogging the filling
hose.
CAUTION
OOS067014L
Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
6-33
What to do in an emergency
6
9. Switch off the compressor.
10. Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
11. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
1. After driving approximately 7~10
km (4~6 miles or about 10 min),
stop at a safety location.
2. Connect the connection hose (9)
of the compressor directly to the
tire valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition swithched on,
proceed as follows.
Carbon monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
OLMF064106
OOS067038L
6-34
What to do in an emergency
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compres-
sor, position I. To check the cur-
rent inflation pressure setting,
briefly switch off the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button (8) on the
compressor.
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may
be damaged.
Information
The pressure gauge may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire reading, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
Information
When reinstalling the repaired or
replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle,
tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13
kgf·m (79~94 lbf·ft).
i
i
NOTICE
The tire inflation pressure must
be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or tow-
ing.
WARNING
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to Distributing
the sealant. Then repeat steps 1
to 4.
Use of the TMK may be ineffec-
tual for tire damage larger than
approximately 4 mm (0.16 in).
We recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer if
the tire cannot be made road-
worthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.
CAUTION
Tire pressure sensor
(if equipped with TPMS)
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel should be
removed when you replace the
tire with a new one and inspect
the tire pressure sensors at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION
6-35
What to do in an emergency
6
IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE ((WWIITTHH TTIIRREE MMOOBBIILLIITTYY KKIITT,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD)) -- TTYYPPEE BB
For safe operation, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary
fix to the tire and we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (distance up to 200
km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of
80 km/h (50 mph) in order to reach a
service station or tire dealer to have
the tire replaced.
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely.
Air pressure loss in the tire may
adversely affect tire performance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use.
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
walls. This can result in an acci-
dent due to tire failure.
WARNING
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit.
WARNING
When two or more tires are flat,
do not use the tire mobility kit
because the supported one
sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is
only used for one flat tire.
CAUTION
OOS067009
6-36
What to do in an emergency
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed
or intended as a permanent tire
repair method and is to be used for
one tire only. This instruction shows
you step by step how to temporarily
seal the puncture simply and reliably.
Read the section "Notes on the safe
use of the Tire Mobility Kit".
Notes on the safe use of the
Tire Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the road
so that you can work with the Tire
Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.
• To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you're on fairly level
ground, always set your parking
brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for seal-
ing/inflation passenger car tires. Only
punctured areas located within the
tread region of the tire can be sealed
using the tire mobility kit.
• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles
or any other type of tires.
• When the tire and wheel are dam-
aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for
your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be
effective for tire damage larger than
approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
If the tire cannot be made roadworthy
with the Tire Mobility Kit, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a tire
is severely damaged by driving run
flat or with insufficient air pressure.
• Do not remove any foreign objects
such as nails or screws that have
penetrated the tire.
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise oper-
ating the compressor may eventually
drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unat-
tended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor running
for more than 10 min. at a time or it
may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the
ambient temperature is below
-30°C (-22°F).
• In case of skin contact with the
sealant, wash the area thoroughly
with plenty of water. If the irritation
persists, seek medical attention.
• In case of eye contact with the
sealant, flush your eyes for at least 15
minutes. If the irritation persists, seek
medical attention.
• In case of swallowing the sealant,
rinse the mouth and drink plenty of
water. However, never give anything
to an unconscious person and seek
medical attention immediately.
• Long time exposure to the sealant
may cause damage to bodily tissue
such as kidney, etc.
Do not use the TMK if a tire is
severely damaged by driving run
flat or with insufficient air pres-
sure.
Only punctured areas located
within the tread region of the tire
can be sealed using the TMK.
WARNING
6-37
What to do in an emergency
6
1. Speed-restriction label
2. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
4. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
5. Holder for the sealant bottle
6. Compressor
7. ON/OFF switch
8. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
9. Button for reducing the tire infla-
tion pressure
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Strictly follow the specified sequence,
otherwise the sealant may escape
under high pressure.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
ODE067044
Expired sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
the sealant has expired (i.e.
pasted the expiration date on
the sealant container). This can
increase the risk of tire failure.
WARNING
Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
WARNING
6-38
What to do in an emergency
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).
2. Connect the filling hose (3) to the
sealant bottle (2) in the direction of
(A) and connect the sealant bottle
to the compressor (6) in the direc-
tion of (B).
3. Ensure that the compressor is
switched OFF.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw the filling hose (3) of the
sealant bottle onto the valve.
Detach the speed restriction
label (1) from the sealant bottle
(2), and place it in a highly visi-
ble place inside the vehicle
such as on the steering wheel
to remind the driver not to drive
too fast.
CAUTION
OOS067010
OIGH067042
OOS067011
Securely install the sealant fill-
ing hose to the valve. If not,
sealant may flow backward,
possibly clogging the filling
hose.
CAUTION
6-39
What to do in an emergency
6
5. Plug the compressor power cord
(4) into the vehicle power outlet.
Only use the front passenger side
power outlet when connecting the
power cord.
6. With the ignition switch in the ON
position, switch on the compres-
sor and let it run for approximately
5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up
to proper pressure. (refer to the
Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The
inflation pressure of the tire after
filling is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the
tire and stay away from the tire
when filling it.
7. Switch off the compressor.
8. Detach the hoses from the sealant
bottle connector and from the tire
valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
9. Immediately drive approximately
7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about
10min) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or
noise, reduce your speed and drive
with caution until you can safely pull
off of the side of the road.
Call for road side service or towing.
NOTICE
OOS067014
Tire pressure
Do not attempt to drive your
vehicle if the tire pressure is
below 200 kPa (29 psi). This
could result in an accident due
to sudden tire failure.
CAUTION
Carbon monoxide
Do not leave your vehicle run-
ning in a poorly ventilated area
for extended periods of time.
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation can occur.
WARNING
OLMF064106
6-40
What to do in an emergency
Checking the tire inflation
pressure
1. After driving approximately 7~10
km (4~6 miles or about 10 min),
stop at a safety location.
2. Connect the filling hose (3) of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3. Plug the compressor power cord
into the vehicle power outlet.
4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
the recomended tire inflation.
With the ignition swithched on,
proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure : Switch on the compressor.
To check the current inflation
pressure setting, briefly switch off
the compressor.
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button (9) on the
compressor.
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may
be damaged.
Information
The pressure gauge may show higher
than actual reading when the com-
pressor is running. To get an accurate
tire reading, the compressor needs to
be turned off.
i
NOTICE
OIGH067043
OOS067011
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to Distributing
the sealant. Then repeat steps 1
to 4.
Use of the TMK may be ineffec-
tual for tire damage larger than
approximately 4 mm (0.16 in).
We recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer if
the tire cannot be made road-
worthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.
CAUTION
6-41
What to do in an emergency
6
Information
When reinstalling the repaired or
replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle,
tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13
kgf·m (79~94 lbf·ft).
Towing service
[A] : Dollies
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
i
Tire pressure sensor
(if equipped with TPMS)
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel should be
removed when you replace the
tire with a new one and inspect
the tire pressure sensors at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION
The tire inflation pressure must
be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or
towing.
WARNING
TTOOWWIINNGG
OOS067007L
The 4WD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
4WD system.
CAUTION
6-42
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OOS067022
OOS067021
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transmission.
CAUTION
If your vehicle is equipped with
a rollover sensor, place the igni-
tion switch in the LOCK/OFF or
ACC position when the vehicle
is being towed. The side impact
and curtain air bag may deploy
if the sensor detects the situa-
tion as a rollover.
WARNING
OOS067023
OOS067041
■ Front
■ Rear
6-43
What to do in an emergency
6
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you have it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commer-
cial tow truck service.
If a towing service is not available in
an emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook at the front (or rear) of the
vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
OOS067042
OOS067025
■ Rear
■ Front
6-44
What to do in an emergency
Always follow these emergency tow-
ing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position so the steering wheel
is not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal as you will have
reduced braking performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12
inches) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the dual
clutch transmission for fluid leaks
under your vehicle. If the dual
clutch transmission fluid is leaking,
flatbed equipment or a towing dolly
must be used.
OOS067027
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks
to pull a vehicle out of mud,
sand or other conditions from
which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own
power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
15 km/h (10 mph) and drive
less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when
towing to avoid serious dam-
age to the dual clutch trans-
mission.
CAUTION
6-45
What to do in an emergency
6
Your vehicle is equipped with emer-
gency commodities to help you
respond to emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, fol-
low these steps carefully.
1. Pull out the safety pin at the top of
the extinguisher that keeps the
handle from being accidentally
pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle towards the base
of the fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze
the handle to discharge the extin-
guisher. If you release the handle,
the discharge will stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth
at the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch carefully
since it may re-ignite.
First aid kit
Supplies for use in giving first aid
such as scissors, bandage and
adhesive tape, etc. are provided.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the
road to warn oncoming vehicles dur-
ing emergencies, such as when the
vehicle is parked by the roadside due
to problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(if equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-
to-day use, and you may have to add
a air periodically and usually it is not
a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal
wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire
pressure increases with tempera-
ture.
To check the tire pressure, take the
following steps:
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the
tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will leak as
you begin and more will leak if you
don't press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will acti-
vate the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to see whether the tire
pressure is low or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressure to the
specified pressure. Refer to "Tires
and Wheels" in chapter 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY CCOOMMMMOODDIITTYY ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
7
Maintenance
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance services ...........................................7-4
Owner's responsibility......................................................7-4
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-4
Owner maintenance...............................................7-5
Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-5
Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-7
Normal Maintenance Schedule
(Gasoline Engine, for Europe)........................................7-8
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
and Low Mileage Conditions
(Gasoline Engine, for Europe)......................................7-11
Normal Maintenance Schedule
(Gasoline Engine, except Europe)...............................7-13
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
and Low Mileage Conditions
(Gasoline Engine, except Europe)...............................7-17
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.7-19
Engine oil ..............................................................7-21
Checking the engine oil level (Gasoline engine) .....7-21
Checking the engine oil and filter ..............................7-23
Engine coolant......................................................7-23
Checking the engine coolant level..............................7-23
Changing the engine coolant .......................................7-25
Brake/clutch fluid................................................7-26
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level........................7-26
Washer fluid .........................................................7-27
Checking the washer fluid level ..................................7-27
Parking brake .......................................................7-27
Checking the parking brake .........................................7-27
Air cleaner ............................................................7-28
Filter replacement...........................................................7-28
Climate control air filter .....................................7-29
Filter inspection...............................................................7-29
Filter replacement...........................................................7-29
Wiper blades.........................................................7-30
Blade inspection ..............................................................7-30
Blade replacement ..........................................................7-30
Battery...................................................................7-32
For best battery service................................................7-33
Battery capacity label....................................................7-34
Battery recharging .........................................................7-34
Reset items .......................................................................7-35
7
7
Tires and wheels..................................................7-36
Tire care............................................................................7-36
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-37
Check tire inflation pressure........................................7-38
Tire rotation .....................................................................7-38
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-39
Tire replacement .............................................................7-40
Wheel replacement.........................................................7-41
Tire traction......................................................................7-41
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-41
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-41
Low aspect ratio tires....................................................7-45
Fuses......................................................................7-46
Instrument panel fuse replacement ...........................7-47
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement.........7-48
Fuse/Relay panel description ......................................7-50
Light bulbs.............................................................7-63
Headlamp, Low beam assist - Static,
position lamp, turn signal lamp and
daytime running light bulb replacement ...................7-64
Front fog lamp .................................................................7-68
Headlamp and front fog lamp aiming (for Europe)..7-68
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-74
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-74
High mounted stop lamp replacement.......................7-76
License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-76
Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-77
Appearance care..................................................7-78
Exterior care ....................................................................7-78
Interior care......................................................................7-82
Emission control system .....................................7-85
Crankcase emission control system...........................7-85
Evaporative emission control system.........................7-85
Exhaust emission control system ...............................7-86
7-3
7
Maintenance
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT
1. Engine coolant reservoir/
Engine coolant cap
2. Fuse box
3. Battery
4. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
5. Air cleaner
6. Engine oil dipstick
7. Engine oil filler cap
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OOS077070L/OOS077001
■■
Gasoline Engine (Kappa 1.0 T-GDI)
■■
Gasoline Engine (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)
7-4
Maintenance
M
MAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI’s high service quality stan-
dards and receives technical support
from HYUNDAI in order to provide
you with a high level of service satis-
faction.
Owner’s responsibility
Maintenance service and record reten-
tion are the owner’s responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been per-
formed on your vehicle in accordance
with the scheduled maintenance serv-
ice charts shown on the following
pages. You need this information to
establish your compliance with the
servicing and maintenance require-
ments of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
Owner maintenance precautions
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational
problems with your vehicle that could
lead to vehicle damage, an accident,
or personal injury. This chapter pro-
vides instructions only for the mainte-
nance items that are easy to perform.
Several procedures can be done only
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified in
any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle and
may, in addition, violate conditions of
the limited warranties covering the
vehicle.
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Service Passport pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, we recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE
7-5
7
Maintenance
OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe, depend-
able operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer
as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated tires.
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS
follow these precautions for
performing maintenance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for dual
clutch transmission vehicle)
position or neutral (for manu-
al transmission vehicle) posi-
tion, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch
in the LOCK/ OFF position.
• Block the tires (front and back)
to prevent the vehicle from
moving.
Remove loose clothing or jew-
elry that can become entan-
gled in moving parts.
WARNING
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-
ing materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.
WARNING
7-6
Maintenance
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of exhaust
fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or loose-
ness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when
traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or
“hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission fluid
level.
• Check the dual clutch transmission
P (Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Autumn)
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with a clean cloth damp-
ened with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate dual clutch
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
7-7
7
Maintenance
SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in
freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition
If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
7-8
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
** : The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can dam-
age the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
*
1
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bot-
tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to
use them. Do not mix other additives.
*
4
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, for Europe)
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km x 1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Drive belts *
1
At first, inspect at 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months,
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine oil and
engine oil filter ** *
2
1.0 T-GDI Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
1.6 T-GDI Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Fuel additives *
3
Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Intercooler, in/out hose,
air intake hose
T-GDI
Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
Air cleaner filter I R I R I R I R
Spark plugs
T-GDI
Replace every 75,000 km (50,000 miles) *
4
or 60 months
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I I I
Fuel tank air filter I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-9
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, for Europe) (Cont.)
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km x 1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day.
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant *
5
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years :
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *
6
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid R R R R R R R R
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
6
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
Maintenance
7-10
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, for Europe) (Cont.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
7
: Manual transaxle/dual clutch transmission fluid, transfer case oil and differential oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
*
8
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.We recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Months 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192
Miles x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
Km x 1,000 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240
Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R
Manual transmission fluid *
7
I I I I
Dual clutch transmission fluid *
7
I I I I
Valve clearance (1.6 T-GDI) *
8
I I
Exhaust system I I I I I I I I
Trasnfer case oil (4WD) *
7
I I I I
Rear differential oil (4WD) *
7
I I I I
Propeller shaft (4WD) I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-11
7
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage and Low Mileage Conditions (Gasoline Engine, for Europe)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe and low mileage driving con-
ditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and engine oil
filter
T-GDI R
Replace every 7,500 km (4,500 miles)
or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
B, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E, G
Manual transmission fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Maintenance
7-12
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in the heavy dust condition
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly
H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack
I : Driving as patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions and under
15,000 km per year.
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Rear differential oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Transfer case oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Propeller shaft (4WD) I
Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)
or 12 months
C, E
7-13
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, except Europe)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Drive belts *
1
I I I I I I I I
Engine oil and
engine oil filter *
2
*
3
T-GDI Replace every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
Fuel additives *
4
Add every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
Intercooler, in/out hose,
air intake hose
T-GDI Inspect every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)
Air cleaner filter
Except Middle East I I R I I R I I
For Middle East R R R R R R R R
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
1
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil can damage
the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
*
4
: If good quality gasolines meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bot-
tle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how
to use them. Do not mix other additives.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-14
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Spark plugs T-GDI Replace every 75,000 km (50,000 miles) *
5
or 60 months
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap I I
Fuel tank air filter I I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I
Cooling system
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day.
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Engine coolant *
6
At first, replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months :
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *
5
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, except Europe) (Cont.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage. For your convenience, it can be
replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7-15
7
Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, except Europe) (Cont.)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Battery condition I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I I
Brake/clutch fluid I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I
Driveshaft and boots I I I I
Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I
Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I
Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Maintenance
7-16
Normal Maintenance Schedule (Gasoline Engine, except Europe) (Cont.)
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
Miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Km x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R
Manual transmission fluid *
7
I I
Dual clutch transmission fluid *
7
I I
Valve clearance (1.6 T-GDI) *
8
I
Exhaust system I I I I
Trasnfer case oil (4WD) *
8
I I
Rear differential oil (4WD) *
8
I I
Propeller shaft (4WD) I I I I I I I I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*
7
: Manual transaxle/dual clutch transmission fluid, transfer case oil and differential oil should be changed anytime they have been
submerged in water.
*
8
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.We recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
7-17
7
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage and Low Mileage Conditions (Gasoline Engine, except Europe)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
T-GDI R 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Spark plugs R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
B, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Maintenance
7-18
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
Driving
condition
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E, G
Manual transmission fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J
Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Rear differential oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Transfer case oil (4WD) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Propeller shaft (4WD) I
Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles)
or 12 months
C, E
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez-
ing temperature
B : Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt
spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E : Driving in the heavy dust condition
F : Driving in heavy traffic area
G : Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads repeatedly
H : Towing a trailer, or using a camper or roof rack
I : Driving as patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
7-19
7
Maintenance
EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe con-
ditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. We recommend that the fuel
lines, fuel hoses and connections be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Fuel filter (for gasoline)
HYUNDAI gasoline vehicle is
equipped a lifetime fuel filter that
integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not
needed but depends on fuel quality. If
there are some important safety mat-
ters like fuel flow restriction, surging,
loss of power, hard starting problem
etc, fuel filter inspection or replace is
needed. We recommend that the fuel
filter be Inspected or replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to ensure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
When you are inspecting the belt,
place the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
CAUTION
7-20
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner
filter be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Spark plugs
(for Gasoline Engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(for Gasoline Engine)
I
nspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. We recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Engine coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Manual transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Dual clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the dual clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake/Clutch fluid
(if equipped)
Check the brake/clutch fluid level in
the brake fluid reservoir. The level
should be between “MIN” and “MAX”
marks on the side of the reservoir.
Use only hydraulic brake fluid con-
forming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifi-
cation.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever and
cables.
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is
hot. You may burn yourself.
WARNING
7-21
7
Maintenance
Brake pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, refer to
the HYUNDAI web site.
(http://ser
vice.hyundai-motor.com)
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
Checking the engine oil level
(Gasoline engine)
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL
OOS077003
OOS077055L
■ 1.0 T-GDI
■ 1.6 T-GDI
7-22
Maintenance
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F (Full) and L (Low).
6. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.
• Do not overfill the engine oil.
It may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
• When you wipe the oil level gauge,
you should wipe it with a clean
cloth. When mixed with debris, it
can cause engine damage.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in chapter 8.)
NOTICE
Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
WARNING
OOS077005
OOS077056L
■ 1.0 T-GDI
■ 1.6 T-GDI
7-23
7
Maintenance
Checking the engine oil and filter
We recommend that the engine oil
and filter be replaced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least
once a year, at the beginning of the
winter season, and before traveling
to a colder climate.
• When the engine overheats from
low engine coolant, suddenly
adding engine coolant may cause
cracks in the engine. To prevent
damage, add engine coolant
slowly in small quantities.
• Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water pump
failure and engine seizure, etc.
Checking the engine coolant
level
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between MAX and MIN (or F (Full)
and L (Low)) marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
NOTICE
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap
and warm water as soon as pos-
sible after handling used oil.
WARNING
EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT
OOS077007
■ Gasoline engine
7-24
Maintenance
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the
level to MAX, (or F (Full)) but do not
overfill.
If frequent additions are required, we
recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant tem-
perature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed. As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with T-GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.
OOS077009
■ Gasoline engine
The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan blades
of the cooling fan.
WARNING
Never remove the
coolant cap/radiator
cap or the drain plug
while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may blow out
under pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait until
the engine cools down. Use
extreme care when removing the
coolant cap/radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
WARNING
7-25
7
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only dis-
tilled (deionized) water for your
vehicle and never mix hard water in
the coolant filled at the factory. An
incorrect coolant mixture can result
in serious malfunction or engine
damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
with phosphate based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the solu-
tion.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each. It is suitable to
use for most temperature ranges of
-35°C (-31°F) and higher.
Changing the engine coolant
We recommend that coolant be
changed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.
To prevent damage to engine parts,
put a thick towel around the radiator
cap and/or radiator cap before refill-
ing the coolant to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts, such as the alternator.
NOTICE
i
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
7-26
Maintenance
B
BRRAAKKEE//CCLLUUTTCCHH FFLLUUIIDD ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
Checking the brake/clutch
fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulat-
ed mileage. This is a normal condition
associated with the wear of the brake
linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low,
we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
Use only the specified brake/clutch
fluid. Refer to “Recommended lubri-
cants and capacities” in chapter 8.
Information
Before removing the brake/clutch filler
cap, read the warning on the cap.
Information
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Use only DOT3 or DOT4 brake/clutch
fluid from a sealed container.
• Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result.
• Brake/clutch fluid, which has
been exposed to open air for an
extended time should never be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be dis-
posed of properly.
• Don't put in the wrong kind of
fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake/clutch system can
damage system parts.
NOTICE
i
i
i
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to come in contact with your
eyes. If brake/clutch fluid comes
in contact with your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention.
WARNING
If the brake/clutch system
requires frequent additions of
fluid this could indicate a leak in
the brake/clutch system. We
recommend that the vehicle be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
OOS077011
7-27
7
Maintenance
WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD
Checking the washer fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 5~7 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
OOS077012
PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE
OOS057010
To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir. Engine coolant can
severely obscure visibility
when sprayed on the wind-
shield and may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flames
to contact the washer fluid or
the washer fluid reservoir.
Washer fluid may contain
alcohol and can be flamma-
ble.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.
WARNING
7-28
Maintenance
A
AIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR
Filter replacement
The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
5. Check that the cover is firmly
installed.
Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element
more often than the usual recommended
intervals (refer to “Maintenance Under
Severe Usage Conditions” in this chap-
ter).
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed. This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts.
Use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.
NOTICE
i
OOS077013
OOS077015
OOS077016
7-29
7
Maintenance
CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it
should be inspected more frequently
and replaced earlier. When you, the
owner, replace the climate control air
filter, replace it performing the follow-
ing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
2. Remove the support strap (1).
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case while pressing the lock on the
right side of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
Install a new climate control air filter
in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol(
↓
↓
) facing downwards,
otherwise, it may be noisy and the
effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
NOTICE
OOS077018
OOS077017
OOS077019
OPD076026
7-30
Maintenance
W
WIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS
Blade inspection
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other compo-
nents, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Information
Wiper blades are consumable item and
normal wear of the wipers may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper mal-
function and failure.
• In order to prevent damage to
the hood and the wiper arms, the
wiper arms should only be lifted
when in the top wiping position.
• Always return the wiper arms to
the windshield before driving.
Type A
1. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
lift up the wiper blade.
2. While pushing the lock (1), pull
down the wiper blade (2).
NOTICE
NOTICE
NOTICE
i
i
NOTICE
OGSR076067
OGSR076066
7-31
7
Maintenance
3. Remove the wiper blade from the
wiper arm.
4. Install a new wiper blade assem-
bly in the reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
OGSR076068
OLF074017
OLF074018
OLF074019
7-32
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, we recommend
that the wiper blades be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OTL075050
OTL075051
BBAATTTTEERRYY
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
WARNING
7-33
7
Maintenance
• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low tempera-
ture area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Batteries contain sulfu-
ric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get imme-
diate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get med-
ical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
OOS077020
7-34
Maintenance
Battery capacity label
The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI
model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capac-
ity (in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
Battery recharging
By battery charger
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
OLMB073072
■ Example
Always follow these instructions
when recharging your vehicle’s
battery to avoid the risk of SERI-
OUS INJURY or DEATH from
explosions or acid burns:
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and place the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF posi-
tion.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
WARNING
• Always work outdoors or in an
area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the fol-
lowing order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
(2) Unhook the negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
•
Always use a genuine HYUNDAI
approved battery when you
replace the battery.
7-35
7
Maintenance
By jump starting
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-
utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle
may not restart if you shut it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See “Jump
Starting” in chapter 6 for more infor-
mation on jump starting procedures.
Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health.
Dispose of the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulations.
Reset items
The following items may need to be
reset after the battery has been dis-
charged or the battery has been dis-
connected.
• Auto up/down window
• Sunroof
• Trip computer
• Climate control system
• Driver position memory system
• Clock
• Audio system
i
AGM battery (if equipped)
• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM)
batteries are maintenance-
free and we recommend that
the AGM battery be serviced
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. For charging your
AGM battery, use only fully
automatic battery chargers
that are specially developed
for AGM batteries.
• When replacing the AGM bat-
tery, we recommend that you
use parts for replacement
from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Do not open or remove the
cap on top of the battery. This
may cause leaks of internal
electrolyte that could result in
severe injury.
CAUTION
7-36
Maintenance
T
TIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within the
load limits and weight distribution rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
All specifications (sizes and pressures)
can be found on a label attached to the
driver’s side center pillar.
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are dam-
aged. Worn tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver’s side center pillar. Always
use a tire pressure gauge to
measure tire pressure. Tires
with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
WARNING
OOS087003
7-37
7
Maintenance
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or has been driven
for less than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Warm tires normally exceed recom-
mended cold tire pressures by 28 to
41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-inflat-
ed. For recommended inflation pres-
sure, refer to “Tire and Wheels” in
chapter 8.
Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long peri-
ods at high speeds.
WARNING
• Under-inflation results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend it be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-38
Maintenance
Check tire inflation pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.
How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflat-
ed when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended pressure. Make sure to
put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or
moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage. If a valve
cap is missing, install a new one as
soon as possible.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of the tire.
Replace the tire if you find any of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
11~13 kgf·m [79~94 lbf·ft]).
7-39
7
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Information
The outside and inside of the unsym-
metrical tire is distinguishable. When
installing an unsymmetrical tire, be
sure to install the side marked "out-
side" face the outside. If the side
marked "inside" is installed on the
outside, it will have a negative effect
on vehicle performance.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Incorrect wheel weights can dam-
age your vehicle’s aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
NOTICE
i
ODH073802
■ Without a spare tire
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.
WARNING
7-40
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OLMB073027
Tread wear indicator
To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recom-
mended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehi-
cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
WARNING
• When replacing tires (or
wheels), it is recommended to
replace the two front or two
rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If only replacing one
pair of tires, it is recommend-
ed to install the pair of new
tires on the rear axle.
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
• Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning may cause sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of vehicle control result-
ing in an accident.
7-41
7
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.The com-
pact spare tire is for emergency
use only. Do not operate your
vehicle over 80 km/h (50 mph)
when using the compact spare
tire.
WARNING
7-42
Maintenance
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
205/60R16 92H
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
92 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.5JX16
6.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
OLMB073028
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
7-43
7
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT shows a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1517 represents
that the tire was produced in the 15th
week of 2017.
4. Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D“ means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maximum Speed
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270km/h (168mph)
Y 300km/h (186mph)
7-44
Maintenance
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD WEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
7-45
7
Maintenance
Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Low aspect ratio tires
A low aspect ratio tire, of which the
aspect ratio is lower than 50, is
designed for a sporty-look vehicle.
The low aspect ratio is to optimize
handling and braking. Thus, it may
be uncomfortable to ride and it may
generate noises, in comparison with
a normal tire.
• When there is an impact on a
tire, inspect the tire condition.
Or, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000 km
(1,800 miles) to prevent a tire
damage.
• It is difficult to recognize a tire
damage only with your eyes.
When there is a slight hint of a
tire damage, check and replace
the tire to prevent the damage
caused by air leakage.
• When a tire is damaged while
driving on a rough road, off a
road, or over obstacles, such
as a pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, your warranty does not
cover the damage.
• The tire information is speci-
fied on the tire side wall.
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
WARNING
The side wall of a low aspect
ratio tire is shorter than the nor-
mal one. Thus, the low-aspect
wheel and tire are easily dam-
aged. Follow the below instruc-
tions.
• When driving on a rough road
or driving off a road, be care-
ful not to damage the tires
and wheels. After driving,
inspect the tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or
curb stone, slowly drive the
vehicle not to damage the
tires and wheels.
CAUTION
7-46
Maintenance
F
FUUSSEESS
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rat-
ing.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immedi-
ately consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Information
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the sys-
tem.
NOTICE
i
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
Blown
Normal
Blown
Normal
Blown
OLF074075
NEVER replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
WARNING
Normal
Blown
■ Multi fuse
7-47
7
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.
5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuses
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. Spare fuses are pro-
vided in the instrument panel fuse
panels (or in the engine compart-
ment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are undamaged, check the
fuse panel in the engine compart-
ment. If a fuse is blown, it must be
replaced with the same rating.
OOS077028
OOS077026
7-48
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.
Information
If the fuse switch is OFF, “Turn on
FUSE SWITCH” message will appear.
(if equipped)
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the transportation
fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse
switch may be damaged.
Engine compartment panel
fuse replacement
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
NOTICE
i
OOS077027 OPDE046119
OOS077024
■ Blade type fuse
OOS077025
■ Cartridge type fuse
7-49
7
Maintenance
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. You
may hear a clicking sound if the
cover is securely latched. If it is
not securely latched, electrical
failure may occur from water con-
tact.
Main fuse
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches off.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Information
If the main fuse is blown, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
If the multi fuse is blown, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
i
NOTICE
OOS077022
OOS077023
7-50
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
Driver’s side fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay names and ratings.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse
box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse
box label.
i
OOS077028
OOS077057L
7-51
7
Maintenance
Driver's side fuse Panel
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
MODULE5
MODULE
5
7.5A
ATM Shift Lever IND., Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, AMP, Head Lamp RH,
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, A/C Control Module, Crash Pad Switch, Head Lamp LH,
ISG DC-DC Convertor, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module,
Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module
MODULE3
MODULE
3
7.5A Stop Switch, BCM, ATM Shift Lever
S/ROOF 20A Sunroof Unit
T/Gate 10A Tail Gate Relay
P/WDW LH
LH
25A Power Window LH Relay, Driver Safety Power Window Module (LHD)
Multi Media
MULTI
MEDIA
15A ISG DC-DC Convertor, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
P/WDW RH
RH
25A Power Window RH Relay, Driver Safety Power Window Module (RHD)
DR/P/Seat
DRV
25A Driver Seat Manual Switch
PS/P/Seat
PASS
25A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
MODULE4
MODULE
4
7.5A
Blind-Spot Collision Warning Unit LH/RH, Active Air Flap, BCM, Parking Distance Warning Buzzer,
Lane Keeping Assist Unit (Line), 4WD ECM
PDM3
3
7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
P/OUTLET2
POWER
OUTLET
2
20A ICM Relay Box (Power Outlet Relay)
7-52
Maintenance
Driver's side fuse Panel
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
ROOM LP 7.5A
Glove Box Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,
Wiresess Charger Unit, Driver Console Switch (With Wiresess), Luggage Lamp
Spare
Spare
7.5A Spare
B/Alarm 10A ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
MEMORY
MEMORY
10A
A/C Control Module, Head Up Display, Instrument Cluster, BCM,
ICM Relay Box (Outside Folding/Unfoling Relay), Rain Sensor
Spare
Spare
20A Spare
AMP
AMP
30A ISG DC-DC Convertor, AMP
MODULE6
MODULE
6
7.5A Smart Key Control Module, BCM
MDPS
1
7.5A MDPS Unit
MODULE1
MODULE
1
7.5A
Active Air Flap, Driver Console Switch (W/O Wiresess Charger),
Hazard Switch, Data Link Connector
MODULE7
MODULE
7
7.5A Front Air Ventilation Seat Module, Front Seat Warmer Module
A/BAG IND
IND
7.5A Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Modulee
BRAKE
SWITCH
BRAKE
SWITCH
7.5A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
7-53
7
Maintenance
Driver's side fuse Panel
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
START 7.5A
Transaxle Range Switch (A/T), Smart Key Control (With Smart Key),
ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay), ECM
CLUSTER
CLUSTER
7.5A Head Up Display, Instrument Cluster
DR/LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)
PDM2
2
7.5A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module
FCA 10A Forward Collision Avoidance Assist Unit
S/HTR 20A Front Seat Warmer Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Module
A/CON2 20A A/C Control Module
A/CON1 7.5A A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (RLY.10)
PDM1
1
15A Smart Key Control Module
SPARE
Spare
10A Spare
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module
IG1
IG1
25A PCB Block (FUSE : F9, F10, F11, F12)
7-54
Maintenance
Driver's side fuse Panel
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
MODULE2
MODULE
2
10A
Wiresess Charger Unit, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit,
ICM Relay Box (Power Outlet Relay), Power Outside Mirror Switch, ISG DC-DC Convertor
Washe 15A Muntifunction Switch
Wiper
LO/HI
10A BCM
R/Wiper 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor
F/Wiper
FRT
25A Front Wiper Motor, PCM Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay)
RR HTD 10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module, ECM
P/OUTLET1
POWER
OUTLET
1
20A Power Outlet
SPARE
Spare
15A Spare
HTD STRG 15A BCM
7-55
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay names and ratings.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle. It is accurate at the time of
printing. When you inspect the fuse
box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse
box label.
i
OOS077029
OOS077058L
7-56
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Relay No. Symbol Relay Name
R LY. 2 E62
2
Cooling Fan #2 Relay
R LY. 3 E63
3
(IG1)
PDM #3 (IG1) Relay
R LY. 4 E64
1
Srart #1 Relay
R LY. 6 E66
4
(IG2)
PDM #4 (IG2) Relay
R LY. 7 E67
FUEL
PUMP
Fuel Pump Relay
R LY. 8 E68
2
(ACC)
PDM #2 (ACC) Relay
R LY. 9 E69
1
Cooling Fan #1 Relay
RLY.10 E70 Blower Relay
RLY.12 E72 Rear Defogger Relay
7-57
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Type Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
MULTI
FUSE-1
MAIN
MAIN
150A E/R Junction Block (Fuse - F20, F21, F22)
MDPS
1
80A MDPS Unit
MULTI
FUSE-2
BATT5
5
60A PCB Block ((Fuse - F7, F8, F14, F15, F16), Engine Control Relay)
BATT2
2
60A IGPM ((Fuse - F30), IPS0, IPS1, IPS2)
BATT3
3
60A IGPM (IPS3, IPS4, IPS5, IPS6, IPS7, IPS8)
BATT4
4
50A IGPM (Fuse - F3, F4, F5, F7, F8, F9, F12, F15, F18)
C/FAN 60A E/R Junction Block (RLY.2, RLY.9)
RR DEFOG 40A E/R Junction Block (RLY.12)
BLOWER 40A E/R Junction Block (RLY.10)
IG1
IG1
40A
W/O Smark Key : Ignition Switch
With Smark Key : E/R Junction Block (RLY.3, RLY.8)
IG2
IG2
40A
W/O Smark Key : Ignition Switch
With Smark Key : E/R Junction Block (RLY.6)
7-58
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
Type Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
FUSE
TCM
T1
15A TCM
V/PUMP
VACUUM
PUMP
20A Vacuum Pump
F/PUMP
FUEL
PUMP
20A E/R Junction Block (RLY.7)
BATT1
1
40A IGPM ((Fuse - F21, F24, F28, F33), Leak Current Autocut Device)
DCT1
DCT
1
40A TCM
DCT2
DCT
2
40A TCM
4WD 20A 4WD ECM
ABS1
1
40A ESC Control Module, Multifunction Switch
ABS2
2
30A ESC Control Module
7-59
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
SENSOR2
S2
10A
PCB Block (A/CON Relay), E/R Junction Block (RLY.9), Purge Control Solenoid Valve,
RCV Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1~#2
ECU2
E2
10A ECM
ECU1
E1
20A ECM
INJECTOR
INJECTOR
15A -
SENSOR1
S1
15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
IGN COIL
IGN COIL
20A Ignition Coil #1~#4
ECU3
E3
15A ECM
A/CON 10A PCB Block (A/CON Relay)
ECU5
E5
10A ECM
SENSOR4
S4
15A Vacuum Pump
ABS3
3
10A ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
TCM2
T2
15A TCM, Transaxle Range Switch
Engine compartment fuse panel
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
7-60
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
SENSOR3
S3
10A E/R Junction Block (RLY.7)
ECU4
E4
15A ECM
H/LAMP 10A PCB Block (Head Lamp(High) Relay)
HORN 15A PCB Block (Horn Relay)
Engine compartment fuse panel
■ Kappa 1.0 T-GDI
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
SENSOR2
S2
10A
PCB Block (A/CON Relay), E/R Junction Block (RLY.9), RCV Control Solenoid Valve,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1~#3
ECU2
E2
10A ECM
ECU1
E1
20A ECM
INJECTOR
INJECTOR
15A -
SENSOR1
S1
15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down)
7-61
7
Maintenance
Fuse Name Symbol Fuse Rating Circuit Protected
IGN COIL
IGN COIL
20A Ignition Coil #1~#3
ECU3
E3
15A ECM
A/CON 10A PCB Block (A/CON Relay)
ECU5
E5
10A ECM
SENSOR4
S4
15A -
ABS3
3
10A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module
TCM2
T2
15A -
SENSOR3
S3
10A E/R Junction Block (RLY.7)
ECU4
E4
15A ECM
H/LAMP 10A PCB Block (Head Lamp (High) Relay)
HORN 15A PCB Block (Horn Relay)
7-62
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Battery terminal cover)
Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay names and ratings.
Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.
i
OOS077035
OPD076065
After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely
install the cover. If it is not securely latched, electrical failure may occur
from water contact.
NOTICE
7-63
7
Maintenance
LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb. This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electrical
wiring system.
Information
After heavy driving rain or washing,
headlamp and tail lamp lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference between
the lamp inside and outside. This is
similar to the condensation on your
windows inside your vehicle when
raining and doesn’t indicate a problem
with your vehicle. If the water leaks
into the lamp bulb circuitry, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
The headlamp aiming should be adjust-
ed after an accident or after the head-
lamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Information
- Traffic Change
(for Europe)
The low beam light distribution is
asymmetric. If you go abroad to a coun-
try with opposite traffic direction, this
asymmetric part will dazzle oncoming
car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE reg-
ulation demand several technical solu-
tions (ex. automatic change system,
adhesive sheet, down aiming). These
headlamps are designed not to dazzle
opposite drivers. So, you need not
change your headlamps in a country
with opposite traffic direction.
i
i
i
NOTICE
Prior to working on a light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is in the
LOCK/OFF position and turn off
the lights to avoid sudden move-
ment of the vehicle and burning
your fingers or receiving an elec-
tric shock.
WARNING
7-64
Maintenance
Headlamp, Low beam assist –
Static, position lamp, turn sig-
nal lamp and daytime running
light bulb replacement
Type A
(1) Headlamp (High)
(2) Headlamp (Low)
(3) Daytime running light
(if equipped) / Position lamp
(4) Turn signal lamp
(5) Front fog lamp (if equipped)
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
OOS077033
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass that
could cause injuries if broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the bulb
to cool down before handling it.
WARNING
OLMB073042L
7-65
7
Maintenance
[1] : High beam, [2] : Low beam
Headlamp and position lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the bulb cover by turning
it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the bulb socket-con-
nector. (for low beam and high
beam)
5. Remove the bulb from the head-
lamp assembly.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Connect the bulb socket-connec-
tor. (for low beam and high beam)
8. Install the bulb cover by turning it
clockwise.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket (1) from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Daytime running light
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend you to have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OOS077038OOS077034
7-66
Maintenance
Type B
(1) Headlamp (Low/High)
(2) Low Beam Assist - static lamp
(3) Daytime running light /
Position lamp (if equipped)
(4) Turn signal lamp
(5) Front fog lamp (if equipped)
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
Headlamp
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend that you have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OOS077052
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will pro-
duce flying pieces of glass that
could cause injuries if broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the bulb
to cool down before handling it.
WARNING
OLMB073042L
7-67
7
Maintenance
Low Beam Assist-static lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4.Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.
OOS077037 OOS077038
7-68
Maintenance
5.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it
locks into place.
6.Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7.Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Position lamp and daytime running
light
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend that you have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Front fog lamp (if equipped)
1. Loosen the pin-type retainers of the
under cover and then remove the
undercover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket coun-
terclockwise until the tabs on the
socket align with the slots of the
housing.
5. Install a new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing
and turn the socket clockwise.
Headlamp and front fog lamp
aiming (for Europe)
Headlamp aiming
1. Inflate the tires to the specified
pressure and remove any loads
from the vehicle except the driver,
spare tire, and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a
flat floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines
passing through respective head
lamp centers) and a horizontal line
(Horizontal line passing through
center of head lamps) on the
screen.
OOS077059L
■ Halogen type ■ LED type
OOS077060L/OOS077061L
7-69
7
Maintenance
4. With the headlamp and battery in
normal condition, aim the head-
lamps so the brightest portion falls
on the horizontal and vertical
lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise. To aim the low beam
up or down, turn the driver clock-
wise or counterclockwise.
To aim the high beam up or down,
turn the driver clockwise or coun-
terclockwise.
Front fog lamp aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as
the same manner of the headlamps
aiming. With the front fog lamps and
battery in normal condition, aim the
front fog lamps. To aim the front fog
lamp up or down, turn the driver
clockwise or counterclockwise.
OOS077062L
7-70
Maintenance
Aiming point
Vehicle condition Lamp type H1 H2 H3 W1 W2 W3
Without driver
mm (in)
Halogen 625 (24.6) 617 (24.28)
332 (13.06)
1506 (59.27) 1320 (51.95)
880 (34.63)
LED 628 (24.71) 1503 (59.15)
With driver
mm (in)
Halogen 617 (24.28) 608 (23.93)
323 (12.71)
1504 (59.15) 1320 (51.95)
LED 620 (24.4) 1503 (59.15)
■ Halogen lamp
■ LED lamp
OOS077063L/OOS077063L
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centers
7-71
7
Maintenance
Headlamp low beam (LHD side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
OOS077065L
■ Based on 10m screen
1 : Vertical line of the left fog lamp bulb center
2 : Horizontal line of fog lamp bulb center
3 : Cut-off line
4 : Car axis
5 : W3 (Front fog)
6 : Vertical line of the right fog lamp bulb center
7 : H3 (Front fog)
8 : GROUND
7-72
Maintenance
Headlamp low beam (RHD side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If headlamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
:
&DUD[LV
9HUWLFDOOLQHRIOHIW
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
&XWRIIOLQH
9HUWLFDOOLQHRIULJKW
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
+RUL]RQWDOOLQHRI
KHDGODPSEXOEFHQWHU
*5281'
+
/RZEHDP
/RZEHDP
OPDE076083
■ Based on 10m screen
7-73
7
Maintenance
Front fog lamp
1. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
OOS077065L
■ Based on 10m screen
1 : Vertical line of the left fog lamp bulb center
2 : Horizontal line of fog lamp bulb center
3 : Cut-off line
4 : Car axis
5 : W3 (Front fog)
6 : Vertical line of the right fog lamp bulb center
7 : H3 (Front fog)
8 : GROUND
7-74
Maintenance
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend that you have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
(1) Stop/Tail lamp
(2) Tail lamp(Type A),
Stop/Tail lamp (Type B)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Rear fog lamp
(LHD : Left side, RHD : Right side)
(5) Backup lamp
(LHD : Right side, RHD : Left side)
OOS077039
OOS077040
■ Type A (Standard)
OOS077041
■ Type B (LED)
OOS077067L
7-75
7
Maintenance
Stop/Tail lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the assem-
bly. Push the socket into the
assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Tail lamp (Type A)
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
OOS077068L
OOS077069LOOS077066L
7-76
Maintenance
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket into the assem-
bly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the assem-
bly. Push the socket into the
assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Tail / Stop lamp (Type B)
If the LED lamp does not operate, we
recommend you to have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Turn signal lamp / Back up lamp /
Rear fog lamp
If these lamps do not operate, we
recommend you to have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
If the high mounted stop lamp does
not operate, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
License plate light bulb
replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens cover from the
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order.
OOS077042 OOS077043
7-77
7
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
■ Map lamp (Type A)
OOS077053
OOS077044
■ Room lamp (Type A)
■ Room lamp (Type B)
OOS077054
OOS077045
■ Map lamp (Type B)
Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Luggage compartment lamp
OOS077046
OOS077048
7-78
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb into the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
Be careful not to damage the
cover, tab, and plastic housing.
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted
surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
• Do not use strong soap, chemi-
cal detergents or hot water, and
do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
NOTICE
NOTICE
■ Glove box lamp
OOS077047
AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE
7-79
7
Maintenance
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers,
make sure to maintain sufficient dis-
tance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors or
its surrounding area directly with a
high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate
normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier
between your paint and contaminate.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while main-
taining a slow forward speed.
WARNING
OOS077051
7-80
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion materi-
als to the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end of
each winter. Pay special attention to
these areas because it is difficult to
see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down the
road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes
that should not be allowed to clog with
dirt; trapped water in these areas can
cause rusting.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated with
a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent,
or wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads.
• Do not wash the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
NOTICE
NOTICE
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while main-
taining a slow forward speed.
WARNING
7-81
7
Maintenance
• Do not use any cleanser contain-
ing acid or alkaline detergents.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective coat-
ings; by stones, gravel, abrasion or
minor scrapes and dents which
leave unprotected metal exposed to
corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to occur.
For example, corrosion is accelerated
by high humidity, particularly when
temperatures are just above freezing.
In such conditions, the corrosive
material is kept in contact with the
vehicle surfaces by moisture that is
slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it
is slow to dry and holds moisture in
contact with the vehicle. Although the
mud appears to be dry, it can still retain
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed.
For all these reasons, it is particularly
important to keep your vehicle clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only
to the visible surfaces but particularly
to the underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
7-82
Maintenance
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and vehicle peting to cause
corrosion. Check under the mats
periodically to be sure the carpeting
is dry. Use particular care if you carry
fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If they
do contact the interior parts, wipe them
off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/elec-
tronic components inside the vehi-
cle as this may damage them.
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or acid/
alkaline detergents, the color of
the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
NOTICE
NOTICE
7-83
7
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric (if equipped)
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with
a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do
not receive immediate attention, the
fabric can be stained and its color can
be affected. Also, its fire-resistant prop-
erties can be reduced if the material is
not properly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Leather (if equipped)
• Features of seat leather
- Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes
through a special process to be
available for use. Since it is a nat-
ural product, each part differs in
thickness or density.
Wrinkles may appear as a natural
result of stretching and shrinking
depending on the temperature
and humidity.
- The seat is made of stretchable
fabric to improve comfort.
- The parts contacting the body are
curved and the side supporting
area is high which provides driv-
ing comfort and stability.
- Wrinkles may appear naturally
from usage. It is not a fault of the
products.
NOTICE
• Wrinkles or abrasions which
appear naturally from usage
are not covered by warranty.
• Belts with metallic acces-
sories, zippers or keys inside
the back pocket may damage
the seat fabric.
• Make sure not to wet the seat.
It may change the nature of
natural leather.
• Jeans or clothes which could
bleach may contaminate the
surface of the seat covering
fabric.
CAUTION
7-84
Maintenance
• Caring for the leather seats
- Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat.
It will prevent abrasion or damage
of the leather and maintain its qual-
ity.
- Wipe the natural leather seat cover
often with dry or soft cloth.
- Use of proper leather protector
may prevent abrasion of the cover
and helps maintain the color. Be
sure to read the instructions and
consult a specialist when using
leather coating or protective agent.
- Light colored (beige, cream beige)
leather is easily contaminated and
the stain is noticeable. Clean the
seats frequently.
- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may
cause the surface to crack.
• Cleaning the leather seats
- Remove all contaminations instant-
ly. Refer to instructions below for
removal of each contaminant.
- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,
foundation, etc.)
Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated spot.
Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth
and remove water with a dry cloth.
- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)
Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contami-
nations do not smear.
- Oil
Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with
stain remover used only for natu-
ral leather.
- Chewing gum
Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for clean-
ing upholstery or carpet. Follow the
instructions provided with the soap. Do
not bleach or re-dye the webbing
because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy film),
they should be cleaned with glass
cleaner. Follow the directions on the
glass cleaner container.
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
NOTICE
7-85
7
Maintenance
EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Service
Passport in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to ensure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance schedule
in this manual.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
For the Inspection and Maintenance
Test (with Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from
misfiring during dynamome-
ter testing, turn the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) sys-
tem off by pressing the ESC
switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC sys-
tem back on by pressing the
ESC switch again.
CAUTION
7-86
Maintenance
•
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park, idle,
or drive the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such
as dry grass, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and cat-
alytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and cat-
alytic converter as you may
get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle and do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control. It
may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
WARNING
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System
is a highly effective system which con-
trols exhaust emissions while main-
taining good vehicle performance.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.Therefore,
if you smell exhaust fumes of any
kind inside your vehicle, have it
inspected and repaired immediately.
If you ever suspect exhaust fumes
are coming into your vehicle, drive it
only with all the windows fully open.
Have your vehicle checked and
repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters (if equipped)
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is dan-
gerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poisoning.
WARNING
7-87
7
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the engine off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the engine off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
8
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Dimensions..............................................................8-2
Engine......................................................................8-2
Bulb wattage...........................................................8-3
Tires and wheels....................................................8-4
Load and speed capacity tires (for Europe) .....8-5
Air conditioning system ........................................8-5
Vehicle weight and luggage volume....................8-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities ...........8-7
Recommended engine oil (For Europe).......................8-8
Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN)..................8-10
Vehicle certification label...................................8-10
Tire specification and pressure label ...............8-11
Engine number .....................................................8-11
Air conditioner compressor label ......................8-11
Refrigerant label..................................................8-12
Declaration of conformity ..................................8-12
8-2
Specifications & Consumer information
D
DIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS
EENNGGIINNEE
Item
Gasoline Engine
1.0 T-GDI 1.6 T-GDI
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
997
(60.84)
1591
(97.08)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)
71.0 x 84.0
(2.79 x 3.30)
77.0 x 85.44
(3.03x3.06)
Firing order
1-2-3 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders
In-line 3 cylinder In-line 4 cylinder
*
1
: with roof rack
mm (in)
Items mm (in)
Overall length 4165 (163.97)
Overall width 1800 (70.86)
Overall height 1550 (61.02) / 1565 (61.61)*
1
Front tread
205/60 R16 1575 (62.0)
215/55 R17 1563 (61.53)
235/45 R18 1559 (61.37)
Rear tread
205/60 R16 1584 (62.36)
215/55 R17 1572 (61.88)
235/45 R18 1568 (61.73)
Wheelbase 2600 (102.36)
8
Specifications & Consumer information
BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE
Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage
Front
Headlamp
Low (Type A) H7 55
High (Type A) H7 55
Low (Type B) LED LED
High (Type B) LED LED
Low Beam Assist-static lamp H7 55
Turn signal lamp PY21W 21
Turn signal lamp (Outside mirror) LED LED
Daytime running lamp (DRL) / position lamp LED LED
Fog lamp H8 35
Rear
Rear combination lamp
Stop/Tail (Type A) P21/5W 21/5
Tail (Type A) W5W 5
Stop/Tail (Type B) LED LED
Turn signal P21W 21
Back up P21W 21
Fog lamp PR21W 21
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamp W5W 5
Interior
Map lamp W10W 10
Room lamp (with sunroof) FESTOON 8
Room lamp (without sunroof) FESTOON 10
Sunvisor lamp FESTOON 5
Tailgate room lamp FESTOON 10
Glove box lamp FESTOON 5
8-3
8-4
Specifications & Consumer information
Item Tire Size Wheel Size
Inflation Pressure Bar (kPa, psi)
Wheel Lug Nut
Torque
kgf·m (lbf·ft, N·m)
Normal Load Maximum Load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
205/60 R16 6.5J x 16
2.3 (230,33) 2.5 (250,36)
11~13
(79~94,107~127)
215/55 R17 7.0J x 17
235/45 R18 7.5J x 18
Compact spare tire T125/80 D16 4.0T x 16 4.2 (420,60)
TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
CAUTION
• It is permissible to add 20 kPa (3 psi) to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are
expected soon. Tires typically lose 7 kPa (1 psi) for every 7°C (12°F) temperature drop. If extreme tempera-
ture variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level.Thus, if you plan
to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level
(Air inflation per altitude: +10 kPa/1 km (+2.4 psi/1 mile)).
• Must do not exceed maximum inflation pressure shown on equipped tire sidewall.
NOTICE
8-5
8
Specifications & Consumer information
*
1
LI : LOAD INDEX
*
2
SS : SPEED SYMBOL
Item Tire Size Wheel Size
Load Capacity Speed Capacity
LI *
1
kg SS *
2
km/h
Full size tire
205/60 R16 6.5J x 16 92 630 H 210
215/55 R17 7.0J x 17 94 670 V 240
235/45 R18 7.5J x 18 94 670 V 240
Compact spare tire T125/80 D16 4.0T x 16 97 730 M 130
LLOOAADD AANNDD SSPPEEEEDD CCAAPPAACCIITTYY TTIIRREESS ((FFOORR EEUURROOPPEE))
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM
Items Weight of Volume Classification
Refrigerant g (oz.)
R-1234yf : 450 (15.87) ± 25 (0.88)
R-134a : 500 (17.63) ± 25 (0.88)
R-1234yf (For Europe)
R-134a (Except Europe)
Compressor lubricant g (oz.) 120 (4.23) ± 10 (0.35) PAG
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
8-6
Specifications & Consumer information
Item
Gasoline Engine
1.0 T-GDI 1.6 T-GDI
2WD 4WD
M/T DCT
Gross vehicle weight
kg (lbs.)
1775 (3913) 1910 (4210)
Luggage volume (VDA)
l (cu ft.)
MIN : 361 (12.74)
MAX : 1143 (40.36)
VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWEEIIGGHHTT AANNDD LLUUGGGGAAGGEE VVOOLLUUMMEE
M/T : Manual transmission
DCT : Dual clutch transmission
Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.
8
Specifications & Consumer information
RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Gasoline
1.0 T-GDI
3.6 l (3.8 US qt.)
API SN & ACEA C2
1.6 T-GDI
4.5 l (4.75 US qt.)
ACEA A5/B5
Manual transmission fluid 1.0 T-GDI
1.6 ~ 1.7 l
(1.7 ~ 1.8 US qt.)
HK SYN MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W MTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
API GL-4, SAE 70W, TGO-9
Dual clutch transmission fluid 1.6 T-GDI
1.9 ~ 2.0 l
(2.0 ~ 2.1 US qt.)
HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL)
GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
API GL-4, SAE 70W
Coolant
1.0 T-GDI
6.8 l (7.1 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant
for aluminum radiator)
1.6 T-GDI
7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)
Rear differential oil (4WD)
0.47~0.52 l
(0.49~0.55 US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)
*
1
: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 9.
*
2
: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
8-7
8-8
Specifications & Consumer information
Lubricant Volume Classification
Transfer case oil (4WD)
0.47~0.52 l
(0.49~0.55 US qt.)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7 ~ 0.8 l
(0.7 ~ 0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
50 l (13.21 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel Requirements” in the Introduction chapter.
Recommended engine oil (For Europe)
Supplier Product
Shell Gasoline Engine
HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA 5W-40
Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant.This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other
mechanisms that could be damaged.
CAUTION
Recommended SAE viscosity number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine
oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however,
higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other
than those recommended could result in engine damage.
8-9
8
Specifications & Consumer information
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
For all countries
■ Kappa 1.0 T-GDI
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
0W-30, 5W-30, 5W-40
• For better fuel economy, it is recommended
to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade.
- For Europe : SAE 0W-30
- Except Europe : SAE 5W-30
* However, if the engine oil is not available in
your country, select the proper engine oil
using the engine oil viscosity chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
For all countries
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
• For better fuel economy, it is recommended
to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade.
- For Europe : SAE 0W-30
- Except Europe : SAE 5W-30
* However, if the engine oil is not available in
your country, select the proper engine oil
using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8-10
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the right front seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the left side dashboard.
The number on the plate can easily
be seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s)
side center pillar gives the vehicle
identification number (VIN).
VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN)) VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN
L
LAABBEELL
OOS087006L
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OOS087002
OOS087001
■ Frame number
8-11
8
Specifications & Consumer information
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, suppli-
er part number, production number,
refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD
P
PRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL
E
ENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR
OOS087003
OOS087007L
■ 1.0 T-GDI
OOS087004
■ 1.6 T-GDI
AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNEERR
C
COOMMPPRREESSSSOORR LLAABBEELL
OHC081001
8-12
Specifications & Consumer information
The refrigerant label provides infor-
mation such as refrigerant type and
amount.
The label is located on the underside
of the hood.
The radio frequency components of
the vehicle comply with requirements
and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1995/5/EC.
Further information including the
manufacturer's declaration of con-
formity is available on HYUNDAI
web site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
RREEFFRRIIGGEERRAANNTT LLAABBEELL
(
(IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
OOS087008L
CE0678
■ Example
DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF
C
COONNFFOORRMMIITTYY ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))
I
Index
I
I-2
Air bag warning labels .................................................2-64
Air bags.........................................................................2-45
Driver's air bag.........................................................2-48
Passenger's front air bag ..........................................2-48
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch................2-49
Side air bags.............................................................2-51
Curtain air bags ........................................................2-52
How does the air bags system operate?...................2-53
SRS components and functions ...............................2-53
SRS warning light ....................................................2-54
What to expect after an air bag inflates ...................2-57
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat ........................................................2-58
Air bag collision sensors..........................................2-58
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision.............2-58
Air bag inflation conditions .....................................2-60
Air bag non-inflation conditions..............................2-61
SRS Care ..................................................................2-63
Additional safety precautions ..................................2-63
Air bag warning labels.............................................2-64
Air cleaner ....................................................................7-28
Air conditioner compressor label .................................8-11
Air conditioning refrigerant label.......................3-115, 123
Air conditioning system specification............................8-5
Alarm system................................................................3-16
Antenna...........................................................................4-2
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .....................................5-31
Appearance care ...........................................................7-78
Exterior care.............................................................7-78
Interior care ..............................................................7-82
Armrest .........................................................................2-14
Audio / Video / Navigation system ................................4-4
Auto defogging system...............................................3-126
Auto light position........................................................3-83
Automatic climate control system ..............................3-116
Automatic ventilation .................................................3-127
Aux, USB and iPod ........................................................4-2
Battery...........................................................................7-32
Battery recharging....................................................7-34
Battery saver function...................................................3-90
Before driving.................................................................5-4
Blade type fuse .............................................................7-48
Blind-spot Collsion Warning (BCW) system ...............5-55
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free..................4-4
Bottle holder ...............................................................3-131
Brake system.................................................................5-28
Power brakes ............................................................5-28
Disc brakes wear indicator.......................................5-29
Parking brake ...........................................................5-29
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).................................5-31
Electronic stability control (ESC)............................5-33
Vehicle stability management (VSM)......................5-36
Hill-start assist control (HAC).................................5-37
Index
A
B
I-3
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) .................................5-37
Downhill Brake Control (DBC)...............................5-38
Good braking practices ............................................5-40
Brake/clutch fluid .........................................................7-26
Bulb replacement..........................................................7-63
Headlamp .................................................................7-64
Front position lamp ..................................................7-64
Front turn signal lamp..............................................7-64
Static bending lamp..................................................7-64
Daytime running light (DRL) ..................................7-64
Side repeater lamp ..................................................7-74
Headlamp aiming .....................................................7-70
Rear combination light bulb ....................................7-74
Rear fog lamp...........................................................7-74
High mounted stop lamp..........................................7-76
License plate light bulb............................................7-76
Interior light bulb .....................................................7-77
Bulb wattage ...................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button................5-9
Capacities (Lubricants)...................................................3-7
Care
Tire care ...................................................................7-36
Exterior care.............................................................7-78
Interior care ..............................................................7-82
Cargo area cover.........................................................3-137
Cartridge type fuse .......................................................7-48
Center console storage................................................3-128
Central door lock switch...............................................3-13
Certification label .........................................................8-10
Chains
Tire chains..............................................................5-101
Changing tires...............................................................6-21
Check tire inflation pressure.........................................7-38
Child restraint system (CRS)........................................2-33
Selecting a child restraint system (CRS) .................2-34
Rearward-facing child restraint system ...................2-34
Forward-facing child restraint system .....................2-35
Booster seats ............................................................2-35
Installing a child restraint system (CRS).................2-36
ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage
for children.............................................................2-37
Securing a child restraint system with
the "ISOFIX Anchorage System" ..........................2-38
Securing a child restraint system seat with
"Top-tether Anchorage" system .............................3-38
Securing a child restraint system with
a lap/shoulder belt..................................................3-41
Child-protector rear door lock......................................3-15
Climate control air filter ...............................................7-29
Manual climate control system ..............................3-108
Automatic climate control system .........................3-116
Clock...........................................................................3-135
Clothes hanger ............................................................3-135
Cluster ionizer.............................................................3-127
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ..............3-37
I
Index
C
I-4
Compact spare tire replacement ...................................7-41
Coolant..........................................................................7-23
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant.................................7-23
Crankcase emission control system..............................7-85
Cruise control system ...................................................5-90
Cup holder ..................................................................3-131
Curtain air bags.............................................................2-52
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination.................................................................3-38
Dashboard, see instrument cluster................................3-37
Day/night rearview mirror............................................3-19
Daytime running light (DRL).......................................3-91
Declaration of conformity ............................................8-12
Defogging (Windshield) .............................................3-124
Defroster .....................................................................3-107
Rear window defroster...........................................3-107
Defrosting (Windshield) .............................................3-124
Dimensions .....................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination.................................................................3-38
Displays, see instrument cluster ...................................3-37
Distance to empty ........................................................3-41
Door locks.....................................................................3-11
Central door lock switch ..........................................3-13
Child-protector rear door lock .................................3-15
Auto door lock/unlock features................................3-15
Downhill Brake Control (DBC) ...................................5-38
Drinks holders, see cup holders..................................3-131
Drive mode integrated control system .........................5-53
Driver assist system......................................................3-96
Rear view monitor....................................................3-99
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system.........3-100
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward)
system ..................................................................3-104
Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system....................5-84
Driver's air bag .............................................................2-48
Driving at night.............................................................5-97
Driving in flooded areas ...............................................5-98
Driving in the rain ........................................................5-97
Dual Clutch transmission (DCT)..................................5-19
DCT warning messages ...........................................5-21
Paddle shifter............................................................5-24
Good driving practices.............................................5-26
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)....................................3-20
Electric power steering (EPS) ......................................3-17
Electronic stability control (ESC) ................................5-33
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)......................................5-37
Emergency towing........................................................6-43
Emission control system...............................................7-85
Crankcase emission control system .........................7-85
Evaporative emission control System......................7-85
Exhaust emission control system.............................7-86
Index
D
E
I-5
Engine compartment ...............................................1-8, 7-3
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement...............7-48
Engine coolant ..............................................................7-23
Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............................3-39
Engine number..............................................................8-11
Engine oil......................................................................7-21
Engine specification .......................................................8-2
Engine start/stop button..................................................5-9
Evaporative emission control System ..........................7-85
Exhaust emission control system .................................7-86
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..............7-19
Exterior care .................................................................7-78
Exterior overview ..........................................................1-2
Front view ..................................................................1-2
Rear view ...................................................................1-3
Floor mat anchor(s) ....................................................3-136
Fluid
Brake/clutch fluid.....................................................7-26
Washer fluid .............................................................7-27
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system ....5-63
Four Wheel Drive (4WD).............................................5-41
Front seat adjustment......................................................2-7
Manual adjustment.....................................................2-7
Power adjustment.......................................................2-9
Seatback pocket........................................................2-11
Adjusting the height up and down...........................2-16
Forward and rearward adjustment ...........................2-16
Removal/Reinstall ....................................................2-17
Fuel filler door..............................................................3-34
Fuel gauge.....................................................................3-39
Fuel requirements ...........................................................F-6
Unleaded ....................................................................F-6
Leaded........................................................................F-7
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol................F-7
Other fuels..................................................................F-7
Use of MTBE.............................................................F-8
Do not use methanol ..................................................F-8
Fuel Additives ............................................................F-8
Operation in foreign countries...................................F-8
Fuses .............................................................................7-46
Instrument panel fuse replacement ..........................7-47
Fuse switch...............................................................7-48
Blade type fuse.........................................................7-48
Cartridge type fuse...................................................7-48
Engine compartment panel fuse replacement ..........7-48
Main fuse..................................................................7-49
Multi fuse .................................................................7-49
Fuse/relay panel description ....................................7-50
Gauges and meters........................................................3-38
Glove box ...................................................................3-128
I
Index
F
G
I-6
Hazard warning flasher...................................................6-3
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-96
Head up display (HUD)................................................3-80
Headlamp delay function..............................................3-90
Headlamp leveling device ............................................3-91
Headlamp position........................................................3-84
Headlight bulb replacement..........................................7-64
Headrest ........................................................................2-15
Front seat headrests..................................................2-16
Rear seat headrests...................................................2-18
Heated steering wheel...................................................3-18
Height adjustment.........................................................2-26
High beam assist (HBA)...............................................3-85
High beam operation ....................................................3-84
Highway driving ...........................................................5-98
Hill-start assist control (HAC) .....................................5-37
Hood .............................................................................3-31
Horn ..............................................................................3-19
How to use this manual..................................................F-5
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly ......6-4
If the engine overheats ...................................................6-8
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ................6-3
If the engine stalls while driving....................................6-3
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't start.........6-5
If the engine will not start ..............................................6-4
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) .........................6-20
Jack and tools...........................................................6-20
Changing tires ..........................................................6-21
Jack label..................................................................6-26
If you have a flat tire (with TMK) - Type A ................6-28
If you have a flat tire (with TMK) - Type B ................6-35
Ignition switch ................................................................5-6
Key ignition switch ....................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button ............................................5-9
Immobilizer system ......................................................3-10
Impact sensing door unlock..........................................3-15
Improtant safety precautions ..........................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt........................................2-2
Restrain all children ...................................................2-2
Air bag hazards ..........................................................2-2
Driver distraction .......................................................2-2
Control your speed.....................................................2-3
Keep your vehicle in safe condition ..........................2-3
In case of emergency while driving ...............................6-3
Indicator light ...............................................................3-44
Inside rearview mirror ..................................................3-19
Instrument cluster .........................................................3-37
Instrument panel illumination ..................................3-38
Gauges and meters ...................................................3-38
Warning and indicator lights....................................3-44
LCD display messages.............................................3-57
LCD display control.................................................3-64
Manual transmission shift indicator.........................3-42
Index
H
I
I-7
Shift lights ................................................................3-42
LCD display modes..................................................3-65
User settings mode...................................................3-68
Assist mode ..............................................................3-67
Trip computer (Type A) ...........................................3-72
Trip computer (Type B, Type C)..............................3-77
Instrument panel fuse replacement...............................7-47
Instrument panel overview .............................................1-6
Interior care...................................................................7-82
Cup holder..............................................................3-131
Bottle holder...........................................................3-131
Sunvisor..................................................................3-132
Power outlet ...........................................................3-132
Wireless cellular phone charging system...............3-133
Clock ......................................................................3-135
Clothes hanger........................................................3-135
Floor mat anchor(s)................................................3-136
Luggage net (holder)..............................................3-136
Cargo area cover ....................................................3-137
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...............................................3-93
Interior lights ................................................................3-93
Interior lamp AUTO cut...........................................3-93
Front lamps ..............................................................3-93
Rear lamps................................................................3-94
Luggage compartment lamp ....................................3-94
Vanity mirror lamp...................................................3-94
Interior overview ............................................................1-4
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system ....................................5-47
Jack and tools ...............................................................6-20
Jack label ......................................................................6-26
Jump starting...................................................................6-5
Label
Tire sidewall labeling...............................................7-41
Vehicle certification label ........................................8-10
Tire specification and pressure label........................8-11
Air conditioner compressor label.............................8-11
Refrigerant label.......................................................8-12
Lane change signals......................................................3-88
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)...................5-73
Lane Keeping Aassist (LKA) system ...........................5-76
Lap/shoulder belt ..........................................................2-25
LCD display
LCD display control.................................................3-64
LCD display modes..................................................3-65
LCD display messages .................................................3-61
LCD display modes ......................................................3-65
Trip computer mode.................................................3-66
User settings mode...................................................3-68
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode ......................................3-66
Assist mode ..............................................................3-67
Warning message mode ...........................................3-67
I
Index
J
L
I-8
Light bulbs....................................................................7-64
Lighting.........................................................................3-83
Auto light position ...................................................3-83
Position lamp position..............................................3-84
Headlamp position ...................................................3-84
High beam operation................................................3-84
High beam assist (HBA) ..........................................3-85
Turn signals..............................................................3-88
Lane change signals .................................................3-88
Rear fog lamp...........................................................3-89
Battery saver function ..............................................3-90
Headlamp delay function .........................................3-90
Daytime running light (DRL) ..................................3-91
Headlamp leveling device........................................3-91
Low Beam Assist-Static light...................................3-92
Low Beam Assist-Static light .......................................3-92
Lubricants and capacities ...............................................8-7
Luggage compartment lamp .........................................3-94
Luggage net (holder) ..................................................3-136
Luggage tray ...............................................................3-130
Main fuse ......................................................................7-49
Maintenance services......................................................7-4
Maintenance services .................................................7-4
Owner maintenance....................................................7-5
Scheduled maintenance services................................7-7
Normal maintenance schedule ............................7-8, 13
Maintenance under severe usage conditions......7-11, 17
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items..........7-19
Tire maintenance......................................................7-41
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe) ................................................................7-11
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe) ..........................................................7-17
Manual climate control system...................................3-108
Manual transmission.....................................................5-16
Using the clutch .......................................................5-16
Downshifting............................................................5-17
Good driving practices.............................................5-18
Manual transmission shift indicator .............................3-42
Mirrors ..........................................................................3-19
Day/night rearview mirror .......................................3-19
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ...............................3-20
Inside rearview mirror..............................................3-19
Outside rearview mirror...........................................3-20
Adjusting the outside rearview mirrors ...................3-21
Folding/Unfolding the outside rearview mirror.......3-22
Moonroof, see sunroof..................................................3-27
Multi box ....................................................................3-129
Multi fuse......................................................................7-49
Multimedia system .........................................................4-2
Aux, USB and iPod....................................................4-2
Antenna ......................................................................4-2
Steering wheel audio control .....................................4-3
Audio / Video / Navigation system............................4-4
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free .............4-4
Index
M
I-9
Normal maintenance schedule (for Europe) .................7-8
Normal maintenance schedule (except Europe)...........7-13
Odometer ......................................................................3-40
Oil (Engine) ..................................................................7-21
Outside rearview mirror ...............................................3-20
Outside temperature gauge ...........................................3-40
Owner maintenance ........................................................7-5
Parking brake................................................................5-29
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) system .............3-100
Parking Distance Warning (Reverse/Forward) system3-104
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch ....................2-49
Passenger's front air bag...............................................2-48
Position lamp position ..................................................3-84
Power brakes.................................................................5-28
Power outlet................................................................3-132
Power steering ..............................................................3-17
Power window lock switch...........................................3-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt...................................................2-28
Rear center seat belt .....................................................2-27
Rear fog lamp ...............................................................3-89
Rear seat adjustment.....................................................2-12
Folding the rear seat.................................................2-12
Armrest.....................................................................2-14
Rear seat headrests .......................................................2-18
Adjusting the height up and down...........................2-19
Rear view monitor ........................................................3-99
Rear window wiper and washer switch........................3-98
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures .................7-37
Recommended lubricants and capacities........................8-7
Refrigerant label ...........................................................8-12
Remote key .....................................................................3-3
Locking ......................................................................3-3
Unlocking...................................................................3-3
Tailgate unlocking......................................................3-3
Mechanical key ..........................................................3-4
Battery replacement ...................................................3-5
Removable towing hook...............................................6-42
Replacement light bulb.................................................7-64
Returning used vehicles ................................................F-9
Rocking the vehicle ......................................................5-96
Rotation (Tire) ..............................................................7-38
I
Index
N
O
P
R
I-10
Safety messages..............................................................F-5
Scheduled maintenance services ....................................7-7
Seat belt warning light
Driver's seat..............................................................2-23
Front passenger's seat ..............................................2-24
Rear passenger's seat................................................2-25
Seat belts.......................................................................2-22
Seat belt safety precautions......................................2-22
Seat belt warning light .............................................2-23
Rear center seat belt.................................................2-27
Lap/shoulder belt......................................................2-25
Seat belt restraint system .........................................2-25
Height adjustment ....................................................2-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt ..............................................2-28
Additional seat belt safety precautions ....................2-30
Seat belt use during pregnancy ................................2-30
Seat belt use and children ........................................2-30
Seat belt use and injured people ..............................2-31
One person per belt ..................................................2-32
Do not lie down........................................................2-32
Care of seat belts......................................................2-32
Periodic inspection...................................................2-32
Keep belts clean and dry..........................................2-32
When to replace seat belts .......................................2-32
Seat warmers.................................................................2-19
Seats................................................................................2-4
Safety precautions ......................................................2-6
Front seat adjustment .................................................2-7
Rear seat adjustment ................................................2-12
Headrest....................................................................2-15
Front seat warmers...................................................2-19
Shift lights.....................................................................3-42
Side air bags .................................................................2-51
Smart key........................................................................3-6
Locking ......................................................................3-6
Unlocking...................................................................3-7
Tailgate unlocking......................................................3-7
Mechanical key ..........................................................3-8
Battery replacement ...................................................3-9
Smooth cornering .........................................................5-97
Snow tires ...................................................................5-100
Spare tire
Compact spare tire replacement...............................7-41
Special driving conditions ............................................5-96
Hazardous driving conditions ..................................5-96
Rocking the vehicle..................................................5-96
Smooth cornering.....................................................5-97
Driving at night ........................................................5-97
Driving in the rain....................................................5-97
Driving in flooded areas ..........................................5-98
Highway driving ......................................................5-98
Speed limit control system ...........................................5-88
Speed sensing door lock ...............................................3-15
Speedometer .................................................................3-38
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start.................6-4
Index
S
I-11
Steering wheel ..............................................................3-17
Electric power steering (EPS)..................................3-17
Power steering..........................................................3-17
Tilt steering / Telescope steering .............................3-17
Heated steering wheel ..............................................3-18
Horn..........................................................................3-19
Steering wheel audio control..........................................4-3
Storage compartment..................................................3-128
Center console storage ...........................................3-128
Glove box...............................................................3-128
Sunglass holder ......................................................3-129
Multi box................................................................3-129
Sunglass holder...........................................................3-129
Sunroof .........................................................................3-27
Sliding the sunroof...................................................3-28
Automatic reverse ....................................................3-28
Tilting the sunroof....................................................3-29
Sunshade ..................................................................3-29
Closing the sunroof ..................................................3-28
Resetting the sunroof ...............................................3-30
Sunroof open warning..............................................3-30
Sunroof inside air recirculation ..................................3-127
Sunvisor ......................................................................3-132
Tachometer ...................................................................3-39
Tailgate .........................................................................3-32
Theft-alarm system .......................................................3-16
Tilt steering / Telescope steering ..................................3-17
Tire chains ..................................................................5-101
Tire load and speed capacity ..........................................8-5
Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type A...............................6-28
Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type B...............................6-35
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) - Type A.......6-9
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) - Type B.....6-14
Tire rotation ..................................................................7-38
Tire specification and pressure label ............................8-11
Tires and wheels ...........................................................7-36
Tire care ...................................................................7-36
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-37
Check tire inflation pressure ....................................7-38
Tire rotation..............................................................7-38
Wheel alignment and tire balance............................7-39
Tire replacement.......................................................7-40
Compact spare tire replacement...............................7-41
Wheel replacement...................................................7-41
Tire maintenance......................................................7-41
Tire traction..............................................................7-41
Tire sidewall labeling...............................................7-41
Low aspect ratio tires...............................................7-45
Tires and wheels specification........................................8-4
Towing ..........................................................................6-41
Trailer towing .............................................................5-104
Trip computer (Type A)................................................3-72
Trip computer (Type B, Type C) ..................................3-77
Turn signals ..................................................................3-88
I
Index
T
I-12
User settings mode .......................................................3-68
Vanity mirror lamp .......................................................3-94
Vehicle break-in process.................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label .............................................8-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)............................8-10
Vehicle modification.......................................................F-9
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ..........................5-36
Vehicle weight ............................................................5-113
Overloading............................................................5-113
Vehicle weight and luggage volume...............................8-6
Warning and indicator lights ........................................3-44
Warning light ................................................................3-44
Washer fluid..................................................................7-27
Welcome system ...........................................................3-92
Interior lamp.............................................................3-92
Wheel alignment and tire balance ................................7-39
Wheel replacement .......................................................7-41
Windows .......................................................................3-23
Power windows ........................................................3-23
Auto up/down window.............................................3-24
Automatic reversal ...................................................3-25
Resetting the windows .............................................3-25
Power window lock switch ......................................3-26
Windshield defrosting and defogging ........................3-124
Windshield washers .....................................................3-97
Windshield wipers .......................................................3-96
Winter driving.............................................................5-100
Snow tires...............................................................5-100
Tire chains..............................................................5-101
Winter Precautions......................................................5-102
Wiper blades replacement ............................................7-30
Front .........................................................................7-30
Rear ..........................................................................7-32
Wipers and washers ......................................................3-95
Windshield wipers ...................................................3-96
Windshield washers ................................................3-97
Rear window wiper and washer switch ...................3-98
Auto rear wiper ........................................................3-98
Wireless cellular phone charging system ...................3-133
Index
U
V
W
